Home

Furuno FAR-2107(-BB) Marine RADAR User Manual

1. de when trial maneuver is active Bo Senge Range Bearing and to cursor position PULSELENGTH Box p ANTENNA Box r Cursor Position Box r PRESENTATION MODE Box SET and DRIFT Boxes RANGE Box REF POINT GAIN Setting DISPLAY Setting A C SEA Setting MODE A C RAIN Setting Box TUNING Setting lt m 6 REF POINT SET 0000 Wm 25 HDG 0 i 000 lojo oat Speed Bouts 340 020 TURERUD Speed 1 X BAND gt g op PULSE 51 330 d 999 13818 808 ECOG over Ground X Ee 946 troan Speed over Ground n Headings Cx fama pes i s2400F 9008 Position EAV OFF 310 e Line s 050 MENU MENU Box 060 ZOOM or TT DATA BOX aap 070 Range See next page Rings 280 080 ZOOM TT or AIS DATA BOX See next page oe o 998 TARGET LIST Box WATCH Box 260 do Chart Align ON TT 250 ah AIS DATA BOX TT ACQ MODE Box 240 VRM 120 Han ASSOCIATION ON OFF Stern North i WATC
2. 1 22 1 13 1 Automatic speed input by log or GPS 1 22 1 13 2 Manual speed Inp t re et e ree ees Pune 1 23 1 14 Choosing a Range Scale uu 1 23 1 15 Choosing a Pulselerigth eer 1 24 1 15 1 Choosing a pulselength ia sores Sl 1 24 1 15 2 Changing pulselenglh rtr Re ERR ER e RR ul Rte Renan 1 25 1 16 Adj stirig thie 1 26 1 17 Reducing Sea Glutf r S cona a ehe 1 27 1 17 1 Choosing method 2 2 2 4 44 1 2 2 0 01 0 41 1 27 1 17 2 Automatic reduction of sea clutter nen 1 27 1 17 3 Manual reduction of sea clutter ecce nennen enean 1 28 1 18 Reducing 1 29 1 18 1 Automatic reduction of rain 1 29 1 18 2 Manual reduction of rain clutter eene nenne 1 29 1 19 Measuring Range suu oko e A tal a m Erie p cO REA HEAR 1 31 1 19 1 Showing hiding the fixed range 1 31 1 19 2 Measuring range by the va
3. LEDs Switching Hub HUB 100 LED status and meaning LED Status Meaning Power Lit Equipment powered Off Equipment off Link Act FDx Col Lit Off Connection with terminal normal Connection with terminal disconnected Data TX or RX Full duplex Half duplex Collision Flashing Lit Off Flashing 100M Lit 100Mbps connection Off 10Mbps connection Switching Hub HUB 100 option The HUB 100 provides switching for a card interface unit and multiple processor units max 7 using an Ethernet interface 100BASE TX 10BASE T LEDs display link activity mode full duplex or half duplex and collision statuses No operation is required of the user Simply turn on the HUB 100 s AC power source to power it LED display The LEDs on the top of the unit light flash or go off according to equipment status When the equipment is powered all LEDs light then go off O O FURUNO Switching Hub HUB 100 1234 7 8 Power DO 000 Link Act onn n n FDx Col ooaa 100M 1 101 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 52 1 102 Anchor Watch The anchor watch feature alerts you when your ship has traveled a distance greater than a threshold value when it should be at rest When the anchor watch is active an orange dashed circle marks the anchor watch range If your ship goes outside the circle ANCHOR WATCH appears in the Alert Box
4. 1 91 1 45 23 Selecting an arnteriia ss ds oed i cut Todd bees Os 1 93 6 C rsor e PT 1 93 1 47 Performance Monitor iino b Rx o kan 1 94 1 47 1 Activating deactivating the performance 1 94 1 47 2 Checking radar performance iier trente et tei uote eta ien 1 94 1 48 Own Ship Marker u e cage e P eco bate Phe b Fo tient eds 1 96 1 49 Color and Brilliance Sets et 1 97 1 49 1 Selecting color and brilliance set ecoute ene 1 97 1 49 2 Presetting color and brilliance 1 97 1 50 Reference ertet nete rero ER rt ita uenia tends RR ER EET RUM acts 1 99 1 91 Switching Hub HUB 100 option outta re 1 101 1 52 1 102 1 53 Drop Marku u ul n et 1 103 1 53 1 Activating the drop 22222 2 4 424 000 1 103 TSS 2 Inscribing a drop IAL us uuu ve deae efe Dre 1 104 1 53 3 Erasing a drop mark rec 1 104 1 54 Sub Monitor B C and W types aede ec tete 1 105 1 99 Ner GUIS OM Use oOo nut sunaha iu
5. Alarm VDR External Monitor IEC 61162 1 Serial Dat C 61162 1 Seria Alay Navigator INS GPS etc Input Output IEC 61162 1 Serial Data Speed Log Gyrocompass E AIS Track Control Unit 100 230 VAC MMC eom i i eee Memory Card id Interface Unit 1_ gt Switching Hub CU 200 HUB 100 1 Max 2 total E e ESL S 1772 1 1 EM PROPERE TT TAC spec 1 Transformer Unit 1 RU 1803 440 VAC 1 50 60 Hz xix SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Console type RCN 003 RCN 004 FAR 2117 2127 2817 FAR 2137S BB 2837S 2837SW 2827 2827W ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT Performance Monitor PM 51 built in Performance Monitor PM 31 built in LT LT Waveguide or Coax cable Waveguide I For FAR 2837SW For FAR 2827W TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR 082 RTR 081A For FAR 2837SW For FAR 2827W CONSOLE RCN 003 004 Alarm POWER SUPPLY UNIT PSU 007 VDR For FAR 21379 28378 OR POWER SUPPLY UNIT PSU 011 External Monitor For FAR 2827W 2837SW Russian flag only IEC 61162 1 Serial Dat a E061162 1 Serial Data Navigator INS GPS etc ERE Speed Log PROCESSOR UNIT RPU 013 lt AS Standard n Switching Hub e s Option HUB 1
6. 1 39 Alarms description 1 84 aos eee E r 1 87 Rr NM 1 88 DMa a ape MU 1 89 Alert DOK uec teer roro eorr rere 1 83 Anchor watcoh 1 102 Antenna information u uy gans es 1 90 selecto Nsan enin 1 91 ANTENNA box 1 90 AZ cie dtd 3 22 B Barge marker 1 61 Battery replacement 6 4 Bearing measurement 1 34 BRILL box 1 11 BRILL control 1 11 Brilliance monitor 1 11 screen 1 75 ede 1 99 COG 1 22 3 20 Collision alarm c p 4 17 E cce ES 3 21 COMO MD 1 97 Control description 1 4 Control unit 1 3 Course up mode 1 18 CPAAUTO ACTIVATE box 4 17 CPA LIMIT box 3 21 4 17 CU TM RESET 1 21 CU TM RESET key 1 21 CURSOR DATA 1 93 INDEX CURSOR 1 10 D Dangerous target 4 5 Data sentences ee E 9
7. me mm m e _ Kim TRGGER ue _ wma sua _ ure 714 Rage Marker i ver 3 oP o e we ve Fong Pulse rust wwe 9 umma fion Voyage Data Recors Mena Overboard NT wer a SCS AP 49 APPENDIX 6 Symbols Symbol Name Radar symbols general power switch Power symbol Own ship marker Origin marks Fixed range rings Variable Range Markers from left VRM1 VRM2 Electronic Bearing Lines from left EBL1 EBL2 OS mark Cursor Heading line North marker Stern marker Barge icon Drop mark Mark Danger Highlight Buoy Buoy Buoy Buoy Buoy Danger Highlight Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Nav Line map Coastline Contour Prohibited Area cable Danger Highlight wlline Buoy wlline Mark AP 50 APPENDIX Mark Radar map symbols for IMO and A type radars
8. Red Buoy Green Buoy gt Buoy Green Buoy Red Buoy ri Red Buoy x Green Buoy Purple Danger Highlight 23 Purple Danger Highlight A Orange Mark LI Orange Mark W Orange Mark eese Purple Navline map White Coastline se Gray Contour Line Purple Danger Highlight v Purple cable Danger Highlight Orange Mark ss Orange Mark TT symbols 1 Z Wee DA L Acquired targets from left initial acquisition one minute after acquisition steady tracking lost target target selected for data readout POOAAK O O TT symbols user may change TT symbol 25 Acquisition zone T Trial maneuver S Performance test AIS symbols 7 AIS symbols from left activated target ROT higher than preset ROT dangerous target lost target target selected for data display sleeping target Other AIS symbols from left real AIS AtoN Virtual AIS AtoN base station airborne SAR aircraft AIS SART A 69 M AIS message received AP 51 APPENDIX This page intentionally left blank AP 52 F U R U IN O FAR 21x7 BB 28x7 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR ARPA TT FAR 21x7 BB 28x7 SERIES 1 ANTENNA RADIATORS 1 Type Slotted waveguide array 2 Beam width and sidelobe attenuation Radiator type X bang 2
9. 5 20 waypoint entry by L L input 5 19 waypoint entry with cursor 5 18 waypoint erasure 5 21 waypoint list 5 22 waypoint name and number 5 23 VRM range measurement with 1 32 1 33 Jis rec TE 1 33 VRMPpbox 1 32 VRM VRM OFF keys 1 32 W Watch alarm 1 76 WAT CH BOX teet apasqa pas 1 76 ijr 1 46 Z ZOOM 1 58 EF U R U N CD B FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD 9 52 Ashihara cho Nishinomiya 662 8580 Japan Tel 81 798 65 2111 Fax 81 798 65 4200 www furuno co jp Publication No DOCQA0217 Declaration of Conformity We FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD Manufacturer 9 52 Ashihara Cho Nishinomiya City 662 8580 Hyogo Japan Address declare under our sole responsibility that the product MARINE RADAR ARPA FAR 2XX7 series Model name type number to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard s or normative document s IMO standards Test standards IMO Resolution A 694 17 IEC 62388 Ed 1 0 2007 IMO Resolution A 823 19 IEC 62288 Ed 1 0 2008 IMO Resolution MSC 191 79 IEC 60945 Ed 4 0 2002 IMO Resolution MSC 192 79 IEC 61993 2 Ed 1 0 2001 ITU R M 628 4 IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 0 2007 ITU R M 8
10. 1 106 RADAR OBSERVATION capa 2 1 PMNEC ITC n 2 1 2 1 1 Minimum and maximum 2 1 2 2 False cete dee PR ER pr bt dha dues icq puede exime depen 2 3 2 3 SART Search and Rescue Transponder escena ennt 2 5 2 3 1 SART descripto e x M 2 5 2 3 2 Showing SART marks on the radar display 2 6 2 3 3 General remarks on receiving 5 6 2 7 24 RACON aio Q S pue kusha Sua casas 2 8 25 Radar Target Enhancer RTE 2 8 lt TARGET TRACKING TT uuu 3 1 2 1 Usage Precautions 3 1 92 RS OMIROIS P 3 2 3 3 Activating Deactivating JT 13 oo eter 3 3 3 4 Entering Own Ship s 2 0 3 3 3 4 1 Echo referenced speed 3 3 3 5 Automatic ACQUISITION i uy uu ron con ERST e HER Ee REN 3 5 3 5 1 Enabling auto acquisition a 3 5 3 5 2 Terminating tracking of targets including reference targets 3 6 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 6 Manual ACquisitionics uu u toit uuu et do o dU e
11. 11 6 4 6 5 Trackball Maintenance ien REA Hob Rute 6 5 6 6 Easy Tro ble shooting u Ernie he peer bd m eerie epa dee eant de ete e ue in 6 6 6 7 Advanced level Troubleshooting u 6 7 0 8 DIAQMOSUCS Nm 6 10 APPENDIX L ITU U va cep u aaa 1 1 2 ENG teal WMS ACC rmm 8 3 Parts Lists and Parts Location ceeds outers AP 30 4 Longitude Error Table on 96 nm range AP 46 95 PROD FOV ALORS sei s uu e S du ELLE 48 6 50 SPECIFICATIONS a aa aa SP 1 INDEX E A E T E E A T IN 1 Declaration of Conformity FOREWORD A Word to the Owner of FAR 2807 FAR 2107 BB Series Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR 2807 FAR 2107 BB Series Radar and ARPA TT We are confident you will see why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality and reliability For over 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and dependable marine electronics equipment This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers Your radar
12. 4 5 activating targets automatically 4 18 activating targets manually 4 5 AIS DISP box 4 2 association 4 19 collision alarm 4 17 COMMONS eer 4 1 detailed target data 4 10 display filter 4 4 lost target 4 14 messages alarm messages 4 25 messages creating 4 22 messages displaying automatically4 25 messages saving 4 22 messages system 4 26 messages transmitting 4 23 messages viewing manually 4 24 past position display plotting Iter Velle errores 4 12 past position points 4 13 ROT setting 4 16 sleeping a target 4 6 symbol brilliance 4 11 SVImIDOLGOlOE 4 11 symbol size 4 11 system messages 4 26 target data 4 9 turning on off 4 2 DISP 4 2 ALARM ACK box 1 40 3 23 ALARM 1 40 ALARM HOX
13. eee 3 32 3 19 Factors Affecting TT Functions U nnn nnne tenen eadeni 3 34 A RIS OPERATION edv eva s dis uv eda 4 1 Xontrols ier o ebd cua a vsu oi cache nee ab ee 4 1 4 2 Showing Hiding the AIS Display nennen ttem hein innen 4 2 4 3 AlS Display Filter arr RE ER ER 4 4 4 4 Activating arfgelSu u beer niei deg 4 5 4 4 1 Activating specific targets 4 5 442 Aclvaling u i Ntc haare Lus s ial addons 4 5 4 5 Howto Sleep Targels s used eed mot else 4 6 4 5 1 Sleeping an individual target e ptu 4 6 4 5 2 Sleeping all targets nte ettet rie 4 6 4 6 Setting Up VOV AGS ioi Pre enu 4 7 viii 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS si eite qaqas 4 9 4 4 1 Basic target Gala kinins EE 4 9 4 12 Detailed target dala uuu uu uuu a baer cand a S n RE Ide cL v 4 10 4 7 3 Removing a target data display 2 eee 4 10 4 7 4 Canceling tracking on a target from target data 4 10 4
14. 1 18 Head up true bearing mode 1 19 tenenti 1 59 2 HL OFF key 1 59 I INDEX LINE 1 52 INS marker 1 61 Interference rejector 1 43 K Key beep 1 82 L LOST TARGET ALARM box 3 9 4 15 Lost target filter AIS 4 14 Lost target filter 3 9 M Main menu 1 5 Maintenance battery replacement 6 4 fuse replacement 6 4 parts replacement 6 3 periodic ette tein Bus 6 2 6 5 MARK DOX 1 55 MENU DO bcm iis ds 1 6 Menu tree AP 1 MODE key 1 17 N Nayi 1 77 Net cursor activating 1 106 adjustment 1 107 Noise rejector 1 45 North marker 1 59 North up 1 19 OFF CENTER 1 42 Off centering 1 42 Origi
15. PICTURE 1 M FA M NEARBUOY FARBUOY 5 M 2 N N N N ION wo Picture setup options and default settings for X band 50 kW and S band 60 kW radars REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST S PULSE 0 5 nm 0 75 nm 1 5 nm nm 12 24 nm L 1 63 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 35 1 Selecting a picture setup option You may select a picture setup options as follows Left click PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select picture setup option desired NEAR BUOY Other possible indications NEAR FAR FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR COAST PICTURE 1 PICTURE 4 1 35 2 Programming and saving picture setups User programmable picture setups and they are provided in the PICTURE box Normally PICTURE1 PICTURE4 are for programming but you may program any other picture item as desired You may program and save them as below 1 Left click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the item to program 2 Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu 1 64 PICTURE MENU INT REJECT OFF 1 2 3 ECHO STRETCH OFF 1 2 3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF 1 2 3 NOISE REJ OFF ON AUTO STC OFF ON AUTO RAIN OFF 1 2 3 4 VIDEO CONTRAST 1 2 9 4 A B C PULSE CONDITION DEFAULT NO SAVE USER FACTORY PULSE menu 1 RADAR OPERATION 3 Setitems 1 6 and 8 referring to the following sections 1 INT REJECT 1 25 5 AUTO STC 1 17 2 ECHO STRETCH
16. XN5A XN12AF XN20AF XN24AF SN36AF Length 10 ft 4ft 6 5ft 8 ft 12 ft Beam width H 0 75 1 8 1 23 0 95 1 8 Beam width V 20 20 20 20 25 Sidelobe within 10 26 db 24db 28db 28 db 24 db 30db 30db 32db 32 db 30 db 3 Polarization Horizontal 4 Rotation FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2827 24 rpm or 42 rpm 21375 28375 21 rpm 50 Hz 26 rpm 60 Hz 45 rpm HSC FAR 2827W 24 rpm FAR 2837SW 21 rpm 50 Hz 26 rpm 60 Hz 45 rpm HSC Relative wind 100 kt On When temperature goes down to 5 C Off When temperature goes up to 12 C 5 Wind tolerance 6 De icer option 2 RF TRANSCEIVER 1 Frequency 2 Output power X band 9410 MHz 30 MHz S band 3050 MHz 30 MHz FAR 2117 BB 2817 12 kW FAR 2127 BB 2827 2827W 25 kW FAR 2137S BB 2837S 2837SW 30 kW 3 Range pulse repetition frequency PRF pulselength PRF Freq Hz Range 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 120 3000 1500 1000 1000 600 500 1 2 4 8 16 32 120 nm ranges not available on IMO radar 32 nm w TT 2200Hz For 96 nm 4 Duplexer Ferrite circulator with diode limiter for FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2137S BB 2817 2827 28375 Ferrite circulator with TR limiter for FAR 2837SW SP 1 519501 F U R U INI 3 MONITOR U NIT
17. 1 BACK 360 32 POINTS L 2 TARGET ALARM MODE IN OUT L 3 TARGET ALARM LEVEL 1 2 3 4 4 WATCH ALARM OFF 6M 10M 12M 15M 20M 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL OFF LOW MID HIGH 6 ALARM OUT1 1BACK 7 ALARM OUT 2 TARGET ALARM WATCH ALARM 8 ALARM OUT3 TT NEW TARGET TT LOST TARGET 9 ALARM OUT4 TT CPA LIMIT TT AUTO ACQ TGT FULL 0 PRIMARY ALARM TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL TT SYSTEM ERROR 1BACK AIS NEW TARGET AIS LOST TARGET 2 TARGET ALARM WATCH ALARM TT NEW AIS CPA LIMIT AIS TGT FULL AZIMUTH HEAD TARGET TT LOST TARGET TT AUTO ACQ TGT LINE TRIGGER VIDEO GYRO LOG FULL TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL AIS NEW EPFS XTE ARRIVAL WPT DEPTH TARGET AIS LOST TARGET AIS TGT FULL ALARM ACK OUT OPERATOR FITNESS XTE ARRIVAL WPT DEPTH ANCHOR WATCH ANCHOR WATCH NO CPA TCPA FOR AIS NO CPA TCPA FOR AIS L 9 ALARM OUT POLARITY NORMAL INVERT 6 IMO and A types show 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE AP 1 APPENDIX Continued from 4TT AIS r 5 PLOTTER Continued on next page Not available on IMO type radar Not available AP 2 previous page 1 BACK r 5 TT AIS SYMBOL 0 ASSOCIATION 1 BACK OWN TRACK INTERVAL r 7 CURSOR L L ALIGN OF _ 2 AZ STAB STAB HDG STAB NORTH AZ POLYGON OFF STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH 4 TRIAL MANEUVER 7 1 BACK 2 TRIAL OFF STATIC DYNAMIC
18. VECTOR TRUE S 15MIN TRUE or REL S Sea stablized G Ground stabilized No stabilization Vector indication in relative time TT VECTOR boxes 3 17 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 11 3 11 1 3 18 2 Push the left button to display VECTOR TRUE S or G or VECTOR REL as appropriate Note that this also selects the vector mode for the past position display 3 Do one of the following to select a vector time Control Available setting Left button 30 sec 1 15 min 1 min interval 20 min 30 min 40 min 50 min 60 min Scrollwheel 30 sec 1 60 min 1 min interval The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time elapses It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk of collision with any target Past Position Display The past position display shows equally time spaced dots marking the past positions of any targets being tracked A new dot is added every minute or at other preset time intervals until the preset number is reached If a target changes its speed the spacing will be uneven If it changes the course its plotted course will not be a straight line Past position orientation true or relative is controlled with TRAIL MODE on the TRAIL menu See section 1 30 1 for the procedure 1 1 7 7 9 S 5 a Ship turning b Ship running c Ship reduced d Ship increased straight speed speed Past p
19. 0 13000029 1 14905813 1 09582188 1 00932899 0 89225746 0 74821409 70 1 24442563 1 18701379 1 09356117 0 96694117 0 81103484 0 3061092 0 43117887 0 21881975 65 1 20131324 1 14577786 1 05546143 0 93315023 0 78260251 0 60843159 0 41596331 0 21107193 602 0 58162173 0 397582 0 20171772 jo jo 55 50 1 08805799 1 03752602 0 95551494 0 84457408 0 70813132 1 0187708 0 55038538 0 37617487 0 19082831 45 09 FIM 0 89442885 0 79046297 0 66265924 0 51496026 0 35190481 0 17848659 0 94174265 0 89774948 0 82653562 0 73033596 0 61214392 0 47561599 0 32495654 0 16478648 40 0 85754099 0 81733258 0 75235195 0 66465066 0 55696981 0 43265198 0 29553516 0 14983224 0 76681293 0 73069528 0 63744242 0 59390696 0 49755683 0 38639524 0 26386458 0 13373769 0 67024897 0 63849695 0 58741521 0 51864327 0 43435714 0 33719779 0 23018583 0 11662531 0 54143927 0 49791741 0 43943239 0 36785173 0 568584 0 28543407 0 19475522 0 09862535 0 46259176 0 44026091 0 40463016 0 35687717 0 29854675 0 23149802 0 15784242 0 07987479 0 1187643 15 0 35307892 0 3357319 0 30826343 0 2716059 0 22696965 0 17580013 0 11972833 0 06051633 10 0 2487894 0 22864776 0 20955062 0 18426754 0 15366517 52 0 12684572 0 11982348 0 10624302 0 09552679 0 0791912 09 0 01184713 0 01008727 0 008104 0 00605903 0 00411455 o JO jo jo JO
20. TRIAL SPEED RATE 0 99 0 00 99 99 kn s two sets 4 TRIAL TURN RATE 0 99 kn 0 00 99 99 kn s two sets 5 TRIAL TGT DATA ACTUAL TRIAL 1 BACK 2 TT AIS SYMBOL COLOR RED GRN BLU CYA MAG WHT 3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT 000 0 720 0 min 4 TT PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 5 AIS PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL OFF ON 6 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE 1 BACK 2 MAX RANGE OFF ON 0 99 NM I 3 MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 0 0 9 9 kn I 4 EXCEPT CLASS B OFF ON L 5 MIN SHIP LENGTH OFF ON 0 999 m 7 AIS DISP FILTER 1 BACK 2 MAX RANGE OFF ON 0 99 I 3 MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 0 0 9 9 kn 4 EXCEPT CLASS B OFF ON L 5 MIN SHIP LENGTH OFF ON 0 999 m 8 AIS LOST FILTER T 1 BACK 2 MAX RANGE OFF ON 0 99 NM I 3 MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 0 0 9 9 kn I 4 EXCEPT CLASS B OFF ON L 5 MIN SHIP LENGTH OFF ON 0 999 m 9 TT LOST FILTER 1 BACK 2 MAX RANGE OFF L MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 1 BACK 2 ASSOCIATION TARGET OFF AIS TT 3 GAP 0 000 0 999 nm 4 RANGE 0 000 0 999 nm 5 BEARING 00 0 99 9 6 SPEED 0 0 9 9 kn L 7 COURSE 00 0 99 9 2 CHART COLOR GRN YEL CYA ORANGE GRAY OFF DRAW 105 308 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M 4 OWN TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 9TGT TRACK INTERVAL OFF
21. 6 5 4 3 J 2 1 1 Type of ship and cargo category 0 to 255 2 Maximum present static draught 0 to 25 5 Meters 3 Persons on board 0 to 8191 4 Destination 1 20 characters 5 Estimated UTC of arrival at destination 6 Estimated day of arrival at destination 00 to 31 UTC 7 Estimated month of arrival at destination 00 to 12 UTC 8 Navigational status 0 to 15 9 Regional application flags 0 to 15 10 Checksum VTG Course over ground and ground speed VTG x x T x x M x x N x x K a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Course over ground degrees true 2 Course over ground degrees magnetic 3 Speed over ground knots 4 Speed over ground km h 5 Mode indicator see note 6 Checksum NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator A Autonomous D Differential E Estimated dead reckoning M Manual input S Simulator N Data not valid The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a null field Data shown in green in case of A and D red in case of E M S and N AP 19 APPENDIX VWR Relative Apparent wind speed and angle VWR x x a x x N x x M x x K hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Measured wind angle relative to the vessel 0 to 180 left right L R of vessel heading 2 Measured wind speed knots 3 Wind speed meters second 4 Wind speed Km Hr 5 Checksum VWT True wind speed and angle VWT x x a x x
22. AD 100 1 5 Track Control Unit OR Memory Card Interface Unit 1 Interface Unit CU 200 CU 200x2 1 7 spec eee aS SS 1 Rectifier Transformer Unit RU 3424 RU483 RU 1746B 2 1 4 te 24 VDC 440 VAC or 16 50 60 Hz 100 115 VAC o 220 230 VAC 16 50 60 Hz 100 110 115 220 230 VAC 16 50 60 Hz 100 230 VAC HUB 100 Console type RCN 001 RCN 002 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FAR 2117 2127 FAR 2137S 2837S 2837SW 2817 2827 2827W ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT Performance Monitor PM 51 built in Performance Monitor PM 31 built in Ij 1 Waveguide Waveguide or 1 For FAR 2827W Coax cable For FAR 2837SW l RTR 082 TRANSCEIVER UNIT For FAR 2837SW TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR 081A For FAR 2827W CONSOLE RCN 001 002 POWER SUPPLY UNIT PSU 007 For FAR 2137S 2837S OR POWER SUPPLY UNIT PSU 011 For FAR 2827W 2837SW Russian flag only PROCESSOR UNIT RPU 013 Standard Option OR Dockyard supply also i be installed Category of Units extemally um Antenna unit Exposed to weather Memory All other units Protected from weather Interface Unit CU 200 100 115 VAC 220 230 VAC 1 50 60 Hz
23. aint uwa Or LEA n 3 7 3 6 1 Setting manual acquisition 3 7 3 6 2 Manually acquiring targets da eto te D estote qao ce ntu EL te fi 3 7 NAE 3 9 2 4 1 Setung the lost target o ot ce etre 3 9 3 7 2 Enabling disabling the lost target 3 9 3 8 TT Symbols and Attributes intere epe rrt 3 10 OE SN CN TC AR a uu M us 3 10 3 8 2 Choosing TT symbol B C and W 3 11 3 8 3 TT symbol brilligahcgezuuu 3 11 3 8 4 TT symbol Color e ER SUAE Ix ERR LR 3 12 39 Displaying Target Data nete recente Poets er b Eoo aede Ceo ot ett eb ug 3 13 3 9 1 Displaying target data 3 13 3 9 2 Target Er 3 15 3 TOCVector MOOBS orem taceat orte 3 16 3 10 1 Description of 86 0 8 uuu a u S aka Hee 3 16 3 19 2 Vector mode and length dedos 3 17 2 14 PastPosombISDIBy Su ene 3 18 3 11 1 Displaying and erasing past position points choosing past position plot interval Hem 3 18 3 11 2 Past position display 3 19 3 11 3 Past position display
24. 5 23 Decl Nav Eneas iesus talc end pb t 5 24 5 11 onte avant 5 24 5 11 2 Editing anav line der eb gies 5 25 5 11 3 Navy li ne ligtu fs rex tee ects u ost 5 26 5 11 5 27 5 11 5 S tting up nav IInigs 5 28 5 11 6 Displaying nav line waypoint mark 10 2 2 2 1 4 10 5 30 9 12 Recording Datar T mu Su SQA 5 32 5 12 1 Initializing memory RAM cards ete tienne nennen inet 5 32 5 12 2 Recording dala nee e 5 33 5 13 Replaying Dalfa reet ette unn ra RR D rase ERR TOR 5 35 5 14 Deleting File Srima sitet p reca meis GO sb LARA 5 36 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 6 1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule tenen 6 2 6 2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts iterom 6 3 6 3 Replacing the Fuse c rr e Rr assqa 6 4 6 4 Replacement of Battery on GC
25. RT POT 22 Diagnostics ET 6 10 Gs ER 3 30 Digital interface 8 DISPLAY MODE box 1 12 3 20 Drop mark ACTIVATING as 1 103 erasing 1 104 1 104 EBL bearing measurement with 1 34 reference 1 35 EBL DON L 1 34 EBL offset assessing risk of collision 1 36 measuring range and bearing between two targelS u erecta 1 38 reference for origin point 1 37 EBL OFFSET key 1 36 1 38 EBL EBL OFF keys 1 34 Echo averaging 1 44 1 43 False echoes 2 3 Function keys 1 68 Fuse replacement 6 4 G GAIN 1 26 GAIN control 1 26 Guidance 1 7 Gyro 1 16 HDG 1 16 retener 1 16 Heading line 1 59 Head up
26. 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 21 1 21 1 1 36 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable measurement of range and bearing between any targets This function is also useful for assessment of the potential risk of collision It is possible to read CPA Closest Point of Approach by using a VRM as shown in a in the illustration on the next page If the EBL passes through the sweep origin own ship as shown in b in the illustration on the next page the target ship is on a collision course How to assess risk of collision by the offset EBL By keyboard 1 Press the EBL ON key to display or activate an EBL No 1 or No 2 2 Put the cursor on a target appearing as threatening A in the illustrated example on the next page by operating the trackball 3 Press the EBL OFFSET key and the origin of the active EBL shifts to the cursor position Press the EBL OFFSET key again to anchor the EBL origin 4 After waiting for a few minutes at least 3 minutes operate the EBL rotary control until the EBL bisects the target at the new position The EBL readout shows the target ship s course which may be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting Note If relative motion is selected it is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as shown in left hand figure at the top of the next page If the EBL passes through the sweep origin own ship
27. 1 Total hex number of sentences need to transfer the messages 2 Hex sentence number 1 to FF 3 Sequential message identifier 0 to 9 4 Encapsulated tracked target data 5 Number of fill bits 0 to 5 TTM Tracked target message TTM X X X X X X 8 X X X X 8 X X X X 8 Cc c a a hhmmss ss a hh CR LF Eq T 1 ELE EE E 4 E E E E E j 43 l EE EE E E EEE t 12 EE EE EE E 11 PIPE EL EE e 10 ll LL EE E Eom 9 ll LL Ep p e 8 l LL Eom 7 l p e 6 poem 5 poe 4 3 T 2 1 Target number 00 to 99 Target distance from own ship Bearing from own ship degrees true relative T R Target speed Target course degrees true relative T R Distance of closet point of approach Time to CPA min increasing Speed distance units K N S User data e g target name 10 Target status see note 11 Reference target R null otherwise 12 Time of data UTC 13 Type of acquisition A automatic M manual R reported 14 Checksum OMNDAAWNHA NOTE Target status L lost tracked target has been lost Q query target in the process of acquisition T tracking AP 27 APPENDIX Serial interface input ports Heading sensor Baud rate is selectable from 4800 bps non IMO only and 38 4 kbps Complies with IEC 61162 2 Isolated RS485 Transceiver RD A LTC1535 RD B 8 OND V Logical High A B gt 0 2V Logi
28. 1 15 Tuning automatic or manual 1 16 initializing 1 15 TX SIBY 1 1 V Video plotter auto target track 5 15 chart display 5 9 chart land color 5 11 IN 4 chart position correction 5 10 cursor data correction 5 8 5 10 displaying nav lines 5 30 graphics 5 12 initializing memory cards 5 32 memory card file deletion 5 36 nav line deleting 5 27 nav line editing 5 25 nav line entry 5 24 nav Tine Ist cente 5 26 nav line 5 28 other track plotting 5 14 own track plotting 5 13 radar map activation 5 3 radar map mark and line erasure 5 6 radar map marks and lines 5 4 radar map position correction 5 8 recording data 5 33 replaying data 5 35 track color 5 15 track erasure 5 17 track erasure from menu 5 16 waypoint editing
29. Interval Max Recording Time Interval Max Recording Time 2 hrs 46 min 66 hrs 20 min 8 hrs 20 min 16 hrs 40 min 100 hrs Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu Select 5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL Select appropriate option Select OFF to stop plotting own ship s track DRAW displays the track but does not record it Push the right button twice to close the menu DM MN en 5 14 5 9 3 5 9 4 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Auto target track A B C and W types You may display the track for up to 15 targets automatically or manually pU 8 9 Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu Select 0 AUTO TARGET TRACK Select OFF or ON as appropriate ON TT target number 1 15 automatically assigned to corresponding ship s track on the plotter display OFF The operator manually assigns target numbers to TT and AIS targets Push the right button twice to close the menu If you selected OFF at step 4 go to step 6 to assign a number to a track Put the cursor inside the effective display then spin the scrollwheel to show TARGET TRACK ON EXIT in the guidance area Select the track of the TT or AIS target for which to assign target number then push the left button Repeat step 7 to assign target numbers to other tracked targets up to 15 targets Push the right button to finish Choosing track color A B C and W t
30. Page 1 brilliance of brilliance of 1 ECHO COLOR Bearing cursor 2 PALETTE EBLs DIMMER control unit characters 5 CURSOR Cursor and 6 TT SYMBOL TT symbols arrow 6 ECHO 7AIS SYMBOL AIS symbols 7 TRAIL Target trails 8 L L Chart grid 0 CHART Chart 3 Roll the scrollwheel to set brilliance level The range of adjustment for items except HL and CURSOR is 0 100 The range of adjustment for HL and CURSOR is 50 100 4 Push the right button once or twice to close the menu 1 75 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 40 Watch Alarm The watch alarm sounds the audio alarm at the selected time interval to help you keep regular watch of the radar picture for safety or other purposes The WATCH box appears at right side of the screen with a watch alarm timer counts down from value set for example 12 00 WATCH 12 00 WATCH box When a preset time interval has elapsed the audible watch alarm is released the screen label WATCH turns red and the watch alarm timer freezes at 0 00 To silence the alarm press the ALARM ACK key on the full keyboard or left click the ALARM ACK box The label WATCH turns to normal color and the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial value and starts the count down sequence again If you press the ALARM ACK key or click the box with the left button before the selected time interval is reached the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial value and starts the count down sequence again To
31. threshold value the ALARM ACK key or left clicking the ALARM ACK box 1 85 1 RADAR OPERATION Alarm name visual indication Visual alarm reason To quit alarm status TT ALARM See section 3 15 WARNING AIS AIS transponder is transmitting Indication disappears when TRANSMITTING procedure is completed CABLE ATT ADJ Adjustment at installation according to length of antenna cable DELETE CARD DATA Deleting data from memory card FORMAT CARD Formatting memory card DATA PM Performance monitor active POWER Loading installation settings from RESTART memory card RD CARD DATA Reading from memory card SART Radar set up to receive SART TUNE INITIALIZE Initializing tuning USER DEFAULT Restoring user defaults WR CARD DATA Writing to memory card Note 1 It is not possible to acknowledge the radar critical alarms from external equipment without displaying the reason cause for the alarm Radar critical alarms are TT COLLISION and AIS COLLISION Note 2 This radar does not receive alarm information from external alarm systems 1 86 1 44 2 1 RADAR OPERATION Alarm list The alarm list displays the names of violated alarms including the time and date violated A maximum of 28 alarms are shown on four pages Unacknowledged alarms are displayed first in the list in red text in the order in whi
32. 3 3 automatic acquisition 3 5 collision alarm 3 21 collision alarm acknowledgement 3 22 COMMONS iios be 3 2 criteria for selecting targets for tracking 3 32 factors affecting operation of 3 34 manual acquisition 3 7 past position display attributes 3 19 past position display interval 3 18 past position display points 3 18 set and drift 3 20 symbol brilliance 3 11 symbol 3 12 symbol description 3 10 symbol selection 3 11 system messages 3 25 target data 3 13 target list 3 15 terminating tracking of targets 3 6 Cie ETE 3 30 trial maneuver activation 3 27 trial maneuver description 3 26 trial maneuver termination 3 29 TT VECTOR box 3 17 vector description 3 16 vector motion and time 3 17 TT ACQ MODE box 3 3 TT VECTOR box 3 17 TUNE box
33. BACK 2 AZ STAB STAB HDG STAB NORTH AZ POLYGON OFF STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH TRIAL MANEUVER TT AIS SYMBOL CPA AUTO ACTIVATE AIS DISP FILTER AIS LOST FILTER OFF ON TT LOST FILTER ASSOCIATION TT AIS menu 3 27 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 Select 4 TRIAL MANEUVER TRIAL MANEUVER 1 BACK 2 TRIAL OFF STATIC DYNAMIC 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE Okn 0 00 5 Okn 0 00kn s 4 TRIAL TURN RATE Okn 0 0 s Okn 0 0 s TRIAL MANEUVER menu 4 Select 2 TRIAL 5 Select STATIC or DYNAMIC as appropriate The TRAIL box appears at the upper right corner TRIAL O FF 6 Select 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE Set trial speed rate with the scrollwheel in the upper box 7 Select 4 TRIAL TURN RATE Set trial turn rate with the scrollwheel in the upper box Note Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided Enter the data by sets as shown in the figure below This is done to provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ship s speed Set 14 Set 24 Set 14 Set 24 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE Set speed and turn rate to I gt Okt O 00kn s zero 0 to simulate course and speed changes not affected by ship s inertia 8 Push the right button three times to close the menu 9 Use the trackball to select the TRIAL box and push the left button Then the TRIAL box reads TRIAL SET and boxes appear above the TRIAL box as below TRIAL SET 0
34. BACK DRIVE SELECT A B C D READ CARD WR MARK WR NAV LINEeWPT Drives available are shown WR OWN TRACK Not available on IMO type WR TARGET TRACK WR SETTING DATA WR INSTALL DATA NEXT N a O1 G gt CARD menu Select 2 DRIVE SELECT Select the drive where you inserted the memory card Push the left button Select 3 READ CARD and push the scrollwheel or the left button DUO gt READ CARD 1 2 1 BACK 2 T200304109 9 W200307318 0 NEXT READ CARD menu 8 Select the data to replay 9 Push the left button to replay selected data The message RD CARD DATA is shown during playback If you selected WR INSTALL DATA the prompt POWER ON RESET appears turn the power off and on again to read in installation data 5 35 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 14 5 36 Note Marks own ship s track and other ships tracks replayed from a memory card are added to the data currently displayed If at replay the memory is full the message MEMORY ERROR appears Press the ALARM ACK key to erase the message Memory capacity is as shown below Mark 20 000 points Own ship s track 20 000 points Other ships tracks 1 000 points x 15 targets Deleting Files Or P S T Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 6 CARD Select 2 DRIVE SELECT Select the appropriate drive Select 0 NEXT CARD 1 BACK 2 FILE DELETE 3 CARD INITIALIZE CARD
35. The range scale is automatically set to 24 nm The radar screen will show one or two arcs If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working conditions in as much as the original state when the monitor was turned up the innermost arcs should appear between 13 5 to 18 5 nm The performance monitor can observe a total of 10 dB loss in transmitter and receiver Display Radar State Transmitter normal Receiver normal Transmitter and receiver No arc is indication of10 db loss Replacement of the magnetron is necessary Note The lengths of the arcs may vary according to installation environment Judge the strength of the echo that appears within 90 behind own ship to confirm if the radar is working properly or not 1 95 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 48 1 96 Own Ship Marker Own ship marker 0 may be inscribed on the screen as below You may enter ten such symbols Each own ship symbols is shown with a number 1 Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the screen The guidance box now reads MARK SELECT MARK MENU MARK Mark type last a selected mark gt number m m Dimensions of own ship Mark box 2 Push the right button to open the MARK menu MARK MENU 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA 2 MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE 8 MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 0
36. eu ere North marker The north marker appears as a short dashed line In the head up mode the north marker moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass signal 1 59 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 34 4 1 60 Own ship symbol The own ship symbol marks own position on the display It can be turned on or off and its configuration selected from the MARK menu Two configurations are available minimized symbol and scaled symbol The scaled symbol is scaled to indicate the length and beam of the vessel If the largest dimension of the symbol gets smaller than 6 mm the symbol will disappear and own ship will be with a minimized symbol Ship s dimensions should be entered at installation to use the scaled ship symbol Antenna lt pending tine 4 Heading line position Beam line Beam line Scaled symbol Minimized symbol Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 to show the MARK MENU Select OFF MIN or SCALED as appropriate Push the right button twice to close the menu Te S 1 34 5 1 34 6 1 RADAR OPERATION Barge marker You may mark the locations of barges on the display with icons This feature is available with an installation preset Set up barge information as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 2 MARK to show the MARK menu 3 Select 7 MARK BARGE INFORMATION BACK 2 BARGE MARK OFF ON BARGE SIZE LENGTH Oft W
37. 166 hr 40 min 41 days 16 hr 13 days 21 hr 20 min 83 days 8 hr 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu PLOTTER BACK 2 CHART COLOR GRN YEL CYA ORANGE GRAY OWN TRACK INTERVAL OFF DRAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M OWN TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT TGT TRACK INTERVAL OFF DRAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M TGT TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAGANHT CURSOR L L ALIGN OFF ON DATA ERASE DISPLAY AUTO TARGET TRACK OFF ON Not available on IMO type PLOTTER menu 3 Select 3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL 4 Select appropriate option Select OFF to stop plotting own ship s track DRAW displays the track but does not record it Track is erased when the power is turned off or the range is changed 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 5 13 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 9 2 Plotting interval for other ships tracks A B C and W types The tracks of 15 targets other ships can be recorded The memory capacity for other ships track is 15 000 points 1 000 points per each of 15 targets When the other ships track memory becomes full the oldest track is deleted to make room for the latest For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to conserve the memory The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track recording time for other ships track Other target plot interval and storage time
38. Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 MARK to open the MARK menu Select 4 PI LINE Select 3 PI LINE Select 1 2 3 or 6 as appropriate Push the right button twice to close the menu PI line orientation PI lines orientation may be selected from parallel or perpendicular This function is available when 3 PI LINE in the PI LINE menu is set for other than 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 MARK to open the MARK menu Select 4 PI LINE Select 4 PI LINE MODE Select PARALLEL or PERPENDIC as appropriate Push the right button twice to close the menu Gy Or ee ct Resetting PI lines You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation 0 degrees for parallel orientation 90 degrees for perpendicular orientation This is faster than doing it manually From the menu Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 MARK to open the MARK menu Select 4 PI LINE Select 5 PI LINE MODE Select YES Push the right button twice to close the menu opc ice Ii From the PI line number box Put the cursor on the PI line number box and long push the left button 1 32 1 32 1 1 RADAR OPERATION Origin Mark You can mark any prominent target or a point of particular interest using the origin mark feature Twenty origin marks may be entered 10 standard origin marks with number and one each of the 10 symbol origin marks The marks may b
39. Origin mark symbols 8 Push the left button again The cursor jumps into the effective display area and the guidance box now reads MARK EXIT 9 Use the trackball to put the cursor on the location desired 10 Push the left button to inscribe the origin mark at the cursor location The bearing and range from the origin mark to the cursor location are shown just below the MARK box MARK gt lt gt Bearing and range from 162 5 T 11 73 origin mark to cursor Mark box showing bearing and range from origin mark e To inscribe a different standard origin mark number or symbol origin mark repeat steps 7 10 ORIGIN MARK No or ORIGIN MARK SYM should be preselected as appropriate e To quit entering origin marks push the right button when the guidance box reads MARK EXIT e Origin mark data reads when the cursor is placed outside the effective display area e ORIGIN appear to the right of the MARK box when an origin mark item is selected 1 32 2 1 32 3 Origin mark stabilization 1 RADAR OPERATION Origin marks may be geographically fixed ground stabilized or moving sea stabilized 1 Right click the MARK box to open the MARK menu MARK MENU ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 000 00 N 000 000 00
40. 03P9346 MIC Assy RU 9760A Circulator RC4910S TR Limiter TL378A Fan Motor MSS 09B24DH R IF Board 03P9335 Transceiver unit RTR 082 cover opened 4 Longitude Error Table on 96 nm range scale The longitude lines concentrate on the north pole and south pole namely 1 nm is equivalent to 1 minute at 0 degree latitude 2 minutes at 60 degrees latitude 3 minutes at 70 degrees latitude and so on For this reason a longitude error occurs on the radar display For example when own ship is at 60 N and 135 E even if the cursor indication is 62 N and 139 E the real cursor position is deviated to the left west side The table below shows the longitude error represented from 0 to 90 at 96 nm from the radar center own ship Real cursor position Real cursor position BN xa R Error N 62 N Y Cursor position Cursor position indicated indicated 96 nm 60 N LAT OF 135 E 139 E OS position Distance error in direction of longitude due to latitude AP 46 40 75 0 2256 0 4444 0 6496 0 8350 0 9950 1 1248 1 2202 0 21980213 0 43290201 0 632803 0 8134132 0 96923215 1 09551918 1 1884382 1 24517456 0 21229339 0 41810678 0 61115946 0 78556318 0 93600295 1 05790007 1 14755221 1 20224625 702 65 0 20316898 0 40012949 0 58486463 0 75173456 0 89565021 0 19249832 0 37910698 0 55411863 0 71218478 0 84848102 0 95885565 1 03998717
41. 1 Right click the TRAIL MODE box to display the TRAIL menu 2 Select 4 TRAIL LEVEL 3 Select level desired The higher the number the greater the intensity of the afterglow 4 Push the right button to close the menu Narrow trails B C and W types Target trails may be painted with thinner lines if desired This can be useful when there are a lot of targets on the screen and it is hard to distinguish one from another gar po a Right click the TRAIL MODE box to display the TRAIL menu Select 3 NARROW TRAIL Select OFF 1 or 2 as appropriate 2 is thinner than 1 Push the right button to close the menu 1 30 7 1 30 8 1 30 9 1 30 10 1 RADAR OPERATION Longer trails B C and W types In addition to the trail times mentioned in section 1 30 2 you may also extend trails 12 24 or 48 hours 1 Right click the TRAIL MODE box to display the TRAIL menu 2 Select 8 TRAIL LENGTH 3 Select NORMAL 12H 24H or 48H as appropriate Note 48H not available with W type NORMAL Trails are extended according to the setting made on the TRAIL MODE box 12H Extend trails for 12 hours 24H Extend trails for 24 hours 48H Extend trails for 48 hours not available on W type 4 f you selected 12 hour 24 hour or 48 hour 9 TRAIL HIDE appears together with start and end times This item allows you to designate a time period in which no trails will be extended Enter time frame at START and END 5 Pus
42. 1 31 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 19 2 1 32 Measuring range by the variable range marker VRM There are two VRMs No 1 and No 2 which appear as dashed rings so that you can distinguish them from the fixed range rings The two VRMs can be distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes the dashes on the No 2 VRM are longer 020 340 350 000 010 adum unit 330 T il 030 No d us m oa Target SS Uy VRM sos SET ee 4060 blip N 000 N oro 2 080 ge Sm No 2 Sq NV 140 ai 150 160 ny 210 poy Mgnt 190 10 gt 45 02 vam1 gt 0 60NM lt I 99 59 vam2_1 18NM L TTG to VRM Measuring range with VRMs By keyboard 1 Press the VRM ON key to display either of the VRMs Successively pressing the VRM ON key toggles the active VRM between No 1 and No 2 The currently active marker is enclosed with gt lt 2 Operate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the lower right corner of the screen Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the RANGE key or the RANGE box This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale 3 Press the VRM OFF key to erase each VRM By trackball 1 Use the trackball to place the arrow in the VRM
43. If the erasure method chosen on the previous page is AREA a rectangle appears when you start dragging the cursor 5 Push the left button to erase track 6 Push the right button to quit Note that this function is automatically canceled if there is no erasure occurring in 30 seconds 5 17 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 10 5 10 1 5 18 Waypoints A particular location is known as a waypoint whether it be a starting point a destination point or an intermediate point on a voyage This unit can store 200 waypoints numbered 001 to 200 Waypoints may be entered with the cursor by manual input of latitude and longitude and at current position Entering waypoints Entering waypoints with the cursor 1 Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the screen MARK gt Mark type last e selected mark number 162 5 T 11 7 nn P I Bearing and range from own ship to waypoint MARK box 2 Push the right button to open the MARK menu MARK MENU 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA 2 MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE 8 MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 000 00 N 000 000 00 E 9 MAP DISPLAY OFF ON 0 MAP MARK COLOR Not available on IMO RED GRN BLU YEL or A type CYA MAG WHT MARK menu 3 Select 2 MARK KIND 4 Select the WPT item which best matches the waypoint number you
44. h2 target height m Radar horizon Optical horizon For example if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the height of the target is 16 meters the maximum radar range is Rmax 2 2 x V9 016 22 2 x 3 4 15 4 nm It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation which absorbs the radar signal 2 1 2 RADAR OBSERVATION 2 2 X band and S band In fair weather the equation on the previous page does not give a significant difference between X and S band radars However in heavy precipitation condition an S band radar would have better detection than an X band radar Radar resolution There are two important factors in radar resolution discrimination bearing resolution and range resolution Bearing resolution Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets that are at the same range and close together It is proportional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the wavelength The length of the antenna radiator should be selected for a bearing resolution better than 2 5 IMO Resolution This condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1 2 m 4 ft or longer in the X band The S band radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet 3 6 m or longer Range resolution Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets that are on the
45. 4 18 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE OFF CPA AUTO ACTIVATE box Limiting the function of the collision alarm You can limit the function of the collision alarm by distance from own ship ship s speed ship class and ship s length 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Choose 4 TT AIS 3 Choose 6 CPAAUTO ACTIVATE CPA AUTO ACTIVATE BACK 2 MAX RANGE OFF ON ONM MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 0 0KN EXCEPT CLASS B OFF ON MIN SHIP LENGTH OFF ON OM CPA AUTO ACTIVATE menu 4 Setitems 2 5 as appropriate MAX RANGE MIN SHIP SPEED EXCEPT CLASS B MIN SHIP LENGTH Any AIS target beyond this range will not be automatically activated Any AIS targets slower than this setting will not be automatically activated Select ON to prevent automatic activation of class B AIS targets Any AIS targets whose length is shorter than this setting will not be automatically activated 5 Push the right button several times to close the menu 4 13 4 AIS OPERATION Association of TT and AIS Targets If the target data from AIS and TT are both available and if the association criteria for example position motion are fulfilled such that the AIS and TT are considered as one physical target the activated AIS or TT target symbol and the alphanumeric AIS or TT target data is automatically selected and displayed If the AIS and radar information become sufficiently different the AIS and radar
46. B Aor B or A and B Push the scrollwheel after making your selection 4 15 2 4 AIS OPERATION 10 Select 8 EDIT and push the scroll wheel or left button A mini keyboard appears at the bottom of the menu Space Mini keyboard 11 Use the trackball to select character desired then push the left button Repeat to enter message The maximum number of characters allowable is as follows ADDRESSED BINARY 151 ADDRESSED SAFETY 156 BROADCAST BINARY 156 BROADCAST SAFETY 161 12 Select END then push the left button 13 Select 7 SAVE FILE 14 Select appropriate number 15 Push the right button to close the menu Transmitting messages 1 Right click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen 2 Do one of the following a Create a message as described in section 4 14 1 b Use a file saved in the memory by choosing 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE followed by 6 OPEN FILE 3 Select 9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE to transmit the message 4 Push the right button to send the message and close the menu AIS TRANSMITTING appears while the message is being transmitted TRANSMIT ERROR appears if a message could not be transmitted 4 23 4 AIS OPERATION 4 1
47. Backlight Unit for 201LHS2F 45 000 h 25 Replace when brilliance 30 000 h 50 C jis uneven or too low FLCL 23 50 000 h 25 C Replace when brilliance 35 000 h 50 C jis uneven or too low LCD assy 856JAU1745V3 40 000 h MU 170C LCD assy LQ190E1LX51 50 000 h MU 190 LCD assy LQ231U1LW32 50 000 h MU 231 The life expectancy figures are typical values Actual life depends on usage 6 3 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 3 6 4 6 4 Replacing the Fuse The fuse at the rear of the processor unit and the display unit protects the equipment from overcurrent and equipment fault If you cannot turn on the power first check the fuse Find the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse A WARNING Use the proper fuse Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage to the equipment or cause fire Ship s mains and fuse to use Unit Power Fuse to use 24 VDC 20A Processor Unit 100 115 VAC 10A 220 230 VAC 5A 100 230 VAC 2A Display Unit MU 201CR 24 VDC 5A 100 230 VAC 2A Display Unit MU 231CR 24 VDC 6A 12 VDC 10A Display Unit MU 170C 24 VDC 5A Display Unit MU 231 100 230 VAC 1 5A Display Unit MU 190 100 230 VAC 1A Replacement of Battery on GC Board The battery installed on the GC GyroCompass Board inside the processor unit preserves gyro data when the power is turned off The life of the battery is about five years When the battery voltage
48. Bearing degrees magnetic Distance nautical miles Waypoint ID Mode indicator see note Checksum G N NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator A Autonomous D Differential E Estimated dead reckoning M Manual input S Simulator N Data not valid The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field AP 10 DTM Datum reference DTM ccc a x x a X xX a x x ccc hh lt CR gt lt LF gt I s 1 Local datum W84 WGS84 W72 WGS72 S85 SGS85 P90 PE90 999 User defined IHO datum code 2 Local datum subdivision code 3 Lat offset min N S 4 Lon offset min E W 5 Altitude offset m 6 Reference datum W84 WGS84 W72 WGS72 S85 SGS85 P90 PE90 7 Checksum DBS Depth below surface DBS x x f x x M x x F hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Water depth feet 2 Water depth m 3 Water depth fathoms 4 Checksum DBT Depth below transducer DBT x x f x x M x x F hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Water depth feet 2 Water depth m 3 Water depth fathoms 4 Checksum APPENDIX AP 11 APPENDIX DPT Depth DPT x x x x x x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 4 3 2 M 1 1 Water depth relative to transducer in meters 2 Offset from transducer in meters see notes 1 and 2 3 Maximum range scale in use 4 Checksum NOTE1 positive distance from transducer to water line distance from transducer to
49. NIGHT GRY NIGHT BLU PANEL DIMMER E 1 CHARACTER CURSOR ECHO 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Not available on IMO or A type BRILL menu 2 Select 1 ECHO COLOR 3 Select echo color desired COLOR available on the B C and W types displays echoes in colors of red yellow and green corresponding to signal levels of strong medium and weak 1 97 1 RADAR OPERATION 4 Select 2 PALETTE 5 Select desired time of day and background color combination TEXT PALETTE BRILL PANEL OTHERS COLOR BKGD CIRCLE 6 Set brilliance related items referring to section 1 39 7 Push the right button to close the BRILL menu Note The above default settings are restored whenever the setting for 2 PALETTE is changed 1 98 1 50 1 RADAR OPERATION Reference Position The reference position for measurements range bearing etc and markers heading line stern mark etc can be antenna position or consistent common reference point CCRP which is a location on own ship to which all horizontal measurements for example range bearing relative course relative speed closest point of approach CPA or time to closest point of approach TCPA are normally referenced To select reference position right click the REF POINT indication at the top of the screen to select ANT or CCRP as applicable The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as shown below If the CCRP is positioned outsid
50. PRIMARY ALARM BACK TARGET ALARM WATCH ALARM TT NEW TARGET TT LOST TARGET TT AUTO ACQ TGT FULL TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL AIS NEW TARGET AIS LOST TARGET AIS TGT FULL XTE ARRIVAL WPT DEPTH ANCHOR WATCH NO CPA TCPA FOR AIS PRIMARY ALARM menu 4 Select alarm s for which you want to give priority equal to that of Error alarms Selected alarms are underlined 5 Press the right button several times to close the menu 1 89 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 45 Interswitch The interswitch of this radar uses an Ethernet to transfer video and control signals A digital signal transfers the video and control signals You can connect four antennas and eight display units Set radar display and antenna groups from the ANTENNA SELECT display When you switch to a different antenna the heading skew and timing adjustment set at installation for that antenna is automatically applied The ANTENNA box at the upper left position shows current antenna selection 6 HEAD UP TB RM ANTENNA Box X ANT1IM X BAND ANT1 Antenna no M Master or S for Slave X band or S band PICTURE4 gt 1 45 1 Displaying antenna information The ANTENNA SELECT display shows e Radar band output power and antenna position of each antenna currently powered If an antenna is not powered its data area is blank e Current antenna and display combinations e Your radar number To show the ANT
51. Speed Log iS Option gt Gyrocompass i Dockyard ele __ be 3 AD 100 Category of Units HIG 100 230 VAC Antenna unit Exposed to weather be Track Control Unit All other units Protected from weather jus gu ps jesse user 1 Memory Card OR MemoryCard 1 1 1 P 1 Interface Unit Interface Unit Switching Hub D CU200 CU 200x2 1 100 ss E eae 20 A TEDAR ae TERSA HUB has ports for connection of up to 7 processor units 7 7 7 7 P 7 spec 25 701 42 77 ypc spec These monitors have been approved by the IMO gt RR B 3 MU 190 201CR for CAT2 MU 231 231CR for CAT1 Rectifier Transformer Unit Ifa different monitor is to be used its effective diameter i RU M24 RU 1803 must meet the applicable Category requirements RU 1746B 2 D E 1 effective diameter 320 mm or higher 6995 2 effective diameter 250 mm or higher i For installation and operation of other monitor o see its manuals 24 VDC 440 VAC or 16 50 60 Hz 100 115 VAC 220230 VAG 100 110 115 19 99 60 Hz 220 230 VAC 1 50 60 Hz Antenna unit SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FAR 2117 BB FAR 2127 BB FAR 2827 RSB 096 24 rpm RSB 097 42 rpm FAR 2137S BB RSB 098 099 21 26 rpm 200 VAC 3g 50 Hz
52. T Target alarm acknowledging offending target 1 40 attributes 1 41 deactivating 1 40 ua Rc 1 39 TARGET LIST 3 15 Target trails cancelling 1 50 COPYING iiit o ere ioa 1 49 1 48 level afterglow 1 50 longer trails 1 51 narrow 5 1 50 reference 1 47 n E DR 1 49 1 48 TCPA LIMIT 3 21 4 17 Text window setup 1 79 Trackball maintenance 6 5 TRAIL MODE 1 48 Troubleshooting advanced 6 7 GIAGNOSIICS 6 10 ENS ua aa s 6 6 True mode 1 21 acquisition zone acknowledging 3 23 acquisition zone activating 3 22 acquisition zone deactivating 3 23 acquisition zone reference 3 24 acquisition zone shape 3 24 INDEX acquisition zone sleeping 3 23 acquisition zone stabilization 3 24 activating deactivating
53. TRUE THEORETICAL TRUE NORTH I 7 TEMP OFF ON 8 DATE TIME OFF UTC LOCAL I 9 LOCAL TIME ADJ 00 00 13 30 0 WPT DATA OFF REL TRUE 8 NAV LINE WPT 1 BACK 2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE OFF EXT DATA INTERNAL DATA WPT r NAV LINE SELECT Enter nav line no FORWARD REVERSE r 4 SKIP NEXT WPT r 5 NAV LINE WIDTH 0 00 9 99 NM r 6 WPT SET r 1 BACK I 2 WPT NO SELECT 3 WPT NAME 4WPT L L 5 CLEAR DATA NO YES Not available on IMO type Continued on next page AP 3 APPENDIX Continued from previous page TEST L 7 WPT LIST 9 NAV LINE LIST 0 NEXT 9 CUSTOMIZE 1 BACK 2 DATA BOX F1 8 NAV LINE SET 1 BACK _ 2 NAV LINE NO SELECT NAV LINE NAME 4 NAV LINE ENTER 5 CLEAR DATA 1 BACK 2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM OFF ON 0 00 9 99 nm 3 TURNING LINE OFF ON REVISED 4 DISP WPT NO OFF ON 5 DISP WPT NAME OFF ON 1 BACK 3 DATA OFF ON 4 ZOOM OFF 2TIMES 3TIMES I 5 ZOOM DISPLAY STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH TT TRACK L 6 TARGET DATA 1BOX 2 3BOX LARGE 3 4 F2 4 5 4 r 6 F4 Default settings F1 IR F2 ES F3 AUTO RAIN SELECT F4 HL OFF Continued on next page AP 4 2 ECHO 1 BACK 2 PICTURE IR ES EAV NOISE REJ ANT SELEC
54. TT AIS AZ Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Control Dependent Control Dependent Control Dependent Control Dependent Control Dependent Control Dependent Control Dependent Control Dependent Control Common Control Common Control Common Control Common Control Common Control Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Echo Sampling at Master Range Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled SLAVE DISPLAY OPTION Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can b
55. Those items contain organic solvents that can damage coating and plastic parts especially plastic connectors 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule Regular maintenance is essential to good performance A regular maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below Checkpoint Checkandmeasues Remarks The LCD will in time accumulate a layer of dust which tends to dim the picture Processor unit cleanliness Exposed nuts and bolts on antenna unit Antenna radiator Terminal strips and Open antenna cover to check plugs in antenna unit TECHNICIANS only Terminal strips sockets earth terminal on processor unit TECHNICIANS only 6 2 Maintenance schedule Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner To remove stubborn dirt use an LCD cleaner wiping slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt Change paper frequently so the dirt will not scratch the LCD Dust and dirt may be removed with a soft cloth Check for corroded or loosened nuts and bolts If necessary clean and repaint them thickly Replace them if heavily corroded Check for dirt and cracks on radiator surface Thick dirt should be wiped off with soft cloth dampened with fresh water If a crack is found apply a slight amount of sealing compound or adhesive as a temporary remedy then
56. changes to normal video and circumscribed when the scrollwheel or the left button is pushed 6 Push the right button to close the menu On some menus several presses of the right button are required to close the menu 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 6 Cursor Menu Functions that require the use of the cursor such as EBL offset and zoom may be activated directly CURSOR MENU from the guidance box or from the CURSOR menu 21 either method with the cursor inside the effective CET 1 p display area is the procedure for choosing TT TGT DATA amp ACQ cursor related function from the CURSOR menu In TARGET TRACK ON later sections only the procedure for selection from TARGET TRACK OFF e ni REF MARK the guidance box is given EBL OFFSET OFFCENTER 1 Put the cursor inside the effective display area ZOOM MARK DELETE 2 Rollthe scrollwheel to SHOW TARGET DATA amp OWN TRACK DELETE CURSOR MENU in the guidance box TGT TRACK DELETE 1 3 Push the right button to show the CURSOR CHART ALIGN menu TRAIL ERASER 8 4 Select 2 then push the left button 9 CURSOR 5 Select function desired then push the left SMALL LARGE button Not available on IMO type Note For operation from the keyboard you may Not available on A type press the 2 key to select a function in top to bottom order or the 8 key to select in reverse order Cursor Menu item Description TARGET DATA amp ACQ TT Acquire
57. from sea clutter Echo averaging uses scan to scan signal correlation technique based on the true motion over the ground of each target Thus small stationary targets such as buoys will be shown while reducing random echoes such as sea clutter True echo averaging is not however effective for picking up small targets running at high speeds over the ground Note 1 With echo average active it is harder to detect high speed targets than stationary ones Note 2 Do not use the echo averaging function under heavy pitching and rolling loss of targets can result Note 3 Echo averaging can be used without a heading sensor For further details contact your dealer Note 4 Echo averaging requires heading position and speed data Before using the echo averaging function reduce sea clutter with the A C SEA control Leave a little sea clutter on the screen so as not to erase weak targets Then do as follows Left click the EAV indication at the left side of the display OFF Echo averaging OFF 1 2 Detects targets hidden in sea clutter 2 is more effective than 1 in detecting targets hidden in strong sea clutter However 1 is more effective than 2 in displaying high speed targets Select the setting best suited to current conditions For effective monitoring of high speed craft you should use 2 together with Wiper 3 Stably displays unstable targets distinguishes high speed craft from sea clutter Note Echo averaging can
58. il ABE STBY CANCEL TRAILS gt o x Trackball Trackball Module Control Unit RCU 014 full keyboard Scrollwheel Left button Right button N Trackball Trackball Module Control Unit RCU 015 palm control 1 3 1 RADAR OPERATION Control description POWER EBL and VRM rotary controls EBL ON EBL OFF ALARMACK STBY TX BRILL AIC RAIN AIC SEA GAIN polarity from North to South and East to West and vice versa MODE OFF CENTER CU TM RESET e Moves own ship position in 75 radius in stern direction e Resets the heading line to 0 in course up and true motion modes INDEX LINE Turns parallel index lines on and off VECTOR TIME Selects vector time length HL OFF Temporarily erases the heading line while pressed VECTOR MODE Selects vector mode relative or true TARGET LIST Displays data for all tracked targets AIS and TT CANCEL TRAILS Cancels all target trails In menu operation it clears a line of data ENTER MARK Enters marks terminates keyboard input VRM ON VRM OFF Turns the VRMs on and off respectively MENU Opens and closes the MAIN menu closes other menus A c RANGE trackball For AIS changes sleeping target to activated target TARGET CANCEL TT Cancel tracking on target AIS Sleep an activated target Control Unit RCU 015 palm control POWER Turns the system on and off F1 F4 Execute m
59. 000 points is allotted for radar map marks and lines When this amount is exceeded no more map marks or lines may be entered unless you erase unnecessary marks or lines Erasing individual radar map marks and lines 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to show MARK DELETE EXIT in the guidance box 2 Use the trackball to put the cursor on the radar map mark or line you wish to erase 3 Push the left button to erase selected mark or line Note When erasing a line the cursor location determines how the line will be erased To erase a single line segment put the cursor on the starting point of the line When the junction point between two line segments is erased the line is redrawn connecting the line segments that were before and after the erased junction See the figure below for an example Erasing a line segment 8 88 After erasing Erasing two lines 1 After erasing 5 6 Cursor location and line processing 5 5 2 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Erasing all radar map marks and lines You can erase all radar map marks and lines from the screen as below Be absolutely sure you want to erase all map marks and lines erased marks and lines cannot be restored 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu 3 Select 8 DATA ERASE DATA ERASE BACK OWN TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL
60. 0m 5 6m RTR 081A MG5436 XN24AF 0 2m 0 5m 3 4m FAR 2837SW RTR 082 MG5223F SN36AF 0 2 1 9m 1 XN12AF 120cm XN20AF 198cm XN24AF 243cm SN30AF 309cm SN36AF 377cm N WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Do not open the equipment Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment Turn off the radar power switch before servicing the antenna unit Post a warn ing sign near the switch indicating it should not be turned on while the antenna unit is being serviced Prevent the potential risk of being struck by the rotating antenna and exposure to RF radiation hazard Wear a safety belt and hard hat when working on the antenna unit Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar antenna mast Do not disassemble or modify the equipment Fire electrical shock or serious injury can result Immediately turn off the power at the ship s mains switchboard if water leaks into the equipment or the equip ment is emitting smoke or fire Continued use can cause fatal damage to the equipment SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS N WARNING Use the proper fuse Use of a wrong luse can result in damage to the equipment or cause fire Keep heater away from equipment Heat can alter equipment shape and melt the power cord which can cause fire or electrical shock Do not place liquid filled containers near the equipment Fire or electrical shock can result
61. 1 08933651 602 559 1 0122297 1 09793265 1 15016811 APPENDIX nm 45 1 2980 1 26402037 1 22034042 1 16737294 1 10552105 1 03525547 0 95711098 0 18036264 0 35519924 0 51915545 0 66721485 0 79485438 0 89818413 0 97406698 1 02021439 0 13614047 0 26808546 50 i 45 0 16685429 0 32858822 0 48024119 0 61716701 0 73517843 0 83067689 0 90076355 0 94332783 40 0 15207608 0 29947644 0 437672 0 56242216 0 66990732 0 7568477 0 82060477 0 85926197 35 0 87168229 0 77961957 30 possess pure 0 53339693 0 59953781 0 3428901 0 44054055 0 52460545 0 11916876 0 2346542 0 10129001 0 19943707 0 29139874 0 37433139 0 44568053 0 08264056 0 16270211 0 23768966 0 30527334 0 36336372 0 41017869 0 44429984 0 46471615 25 20 10 0 02350833 0 04623087 0 0674093 0 08634588 0 10242699 0 01403609 0 0144058 0 0141187 0 01323356 55 0 75 1 2780 1 2192 1 1233 0 9933 0 8332 0 6479 0 4431 0 50326182 0 54532952 0 57063015 15 0 06336208 0 12472888 0 18217162 0 23389198 0 27828148 0 31397386 0 33988878 0 35526538 0 67725844 0 73420069 0 76865661 0 59251483 0 6422089 0 67220131 0 68162348 0 57843983 0 47085389 0 35968447 0 24577764 0 21537949 0 23289096 0 24311083 0 04360137 0 0858064 0 12526714 0 16073056 0 19108136 0 00323737 0 0063035 0 00903844 0 01130406 0 01299309 0 11514595 0 1241207 0 12910605 0 2249
62. 1 21 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 13 Entering Own Ship s Speed The TT and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed input and compass signal The speed can be entered from a log STW or GPS SOG or manually on the menu Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP 90 provides COG and SOG 1 13 1 A Automatic speed input by log or GPS navigator 1 Right click the SPD box at the top right corner of the screen SPEED MENU 1 SHIP SPEED LOG BTYLOG WTY GPS MANUAL REF 2 MANUAL SPEED 0 0kn 3 SET DRIFT OFF ON SPEED menu 2 Select 1 SHIP SPEED 3 Select the appropriate source for automatic speed input then push the left button LOG BT Log speed over ground SOG Note that a log cannot produce BT Bottom Tracking speed in deep waters without set and drift entry LOG WT Log speed thru water STW GPS Speed input by GPS navigator MANUAL Manually input speed REF Echo referenced speed input 4 Push the right button to close the menu Notes on speed input e IMO Resolution A 823 19 for TT recommends that a speed log to be interfaced with a TT should be capable of providing through the water speed forward speed e Be sure not to select a LOG option when a speed log is not connected If the log signal is not provided the ship speed readout at the top of the screen will be blank In the event of a log error enter speed manually e The SPD is shown as kn and the label LOG in red appears and the al
63. 12 If necessary Select 4 LOW LEVEL ECHO to reject low level echoes The setting range is 0 8 The higher the figure the stronger the low level echo that is erased 13 To save a program Select 0 DEFAULT 14 Select SAVE and push the scrollwheel or left button 15 Push the right button twice to close the menu Note You may also program and save other picture setups Restoring user settings If you get lost in operation while adjusting the settings for a picture setup you can easily restore user settings for that picture setup Note that user settings are deleted when default settings are restored 1 Left click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the picture setup option for which you want to restore its user settings Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu Select 0 DEFAULT Select USER and push the left button or scrollwheel Push the right button to close the menu u FS Oo S Restoring default picture setup options Any of the radar functions programmed with the picture setup options may be adjusted as desired If you get lost in operation and want to restore the default settings for a particular picture setup operation do the following 1 Left click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the picture setup option for which you want to restore its default settings Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu Select 0 DEFAULT Select FACTORY and push the left button or
64. A and B 6 OPEN FILE 1 7 SAVE FILE 1 8 9 EDIT TRANSMIT MESSAGE TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu VOYAGE DATA 1 BACK 2 NAVIGATION STATUS 00 3 ETA 00 000 0000 00 00 4 DESTINATION 5 DRAUGHT 00 0m 6 CREW 0002 STATIC DATA 1 BACK TYPE OF SHIP 000 ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE CALL SIGN NAME EXT GPS ANT POSN A 000m 00 00m D 00m VOYAGE DATA menu STATIC DATA menu TARGET LIST MENU 1 SORT BY CPA TCPA BCR BCT RANGE SPEED TGT LIST menu 1 Shown when 12H 24H or 48H is chosen at 8 TRAIL LENGTH Band W types 48H not available on W type 3 Not available on IMO type Not available on A type Not available on W type TRAIL menu AP 6 TRAIL MENU 1 TRAIL MODE REL TRUE 2 TRAIL GRAD SINGLE MULTI 3 NARROW TRAIL 43 4 1 2 4 TRAIL LEVEL 1 2 3 4 5 TRAIL RESTART OFF ON 6 TRAIL COPY OFF ON 7 OS TRAIL 1 2 8 TRAIL LENGTH 2 NORMAL 12 24H 48H 9 TRAIL HIDE 3 4 START 00 00 END 00 00 TRAIL COLOR 4 5 TRAIL COLOR 1 BACK 2 COLOR SHIFT NO YES 3 TRAIL COLOR FUCHSIA MAROON RED PURPLE YELLOW LIME GREEN OLIVE TEAL CYAN BLUE 12 NAVY po a m D ea Ere TRAIL COLOR menu BRILL1 MENU 1 2 ECHO COLOR YEL GRN WHT COLOR 2 PALETTE DAY GRY DAY BLU DUSK GRY DUSK BLU NIGHT GRY NIGHT BLU 3 PANEL
65. ALARM box shows ALARMx ACK This will deactivate the audio alarm but will not stop the flashing of the offending target To reactivate the audio alarm press the ALARM ACK key again or select the ALARM box then push the left button When an external buzzer is connected the audio alarm does not stop until the alarm zone itself is deactivated The ALARM box shows ALARMx WORK Deactivating a target alarm Left click ALARM1 or ALARM2 box whichever alarm you wish to deactivate until the alarm status in the ALARM box disappears In this radar deactivation of the target alarm zone 1 deactivates target alarm zone 2 1 23 4 1 RADAR OPERATION Target alarm attributes You may select the echo strength level that triggers the alarm the condition that generates the alarm and the volume of the audio alarm as follows 1 2 N Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 3 ALARM ALARM BACK TARGET ALARM MODE IN OUT TARGET ALARM LEVEL 1 2 3 4 WATCH ALARM OFF 6M 10M 12M 15M 20M ALARM SOUND LEVEL OFF LOW MID HIGH ALARM OUT1 ALARM OUT2 ALARM OUT3 ALARM PRIMARY ALARM ALARM menu Select 2 TARGET ALARM MODE Select IN or OUT as appropriate IN Targets entering the zone trigger the alarms OUT Targets exiting the zone trigger the alarms Inward target alarm Outward target alarm Alarm types Select 3 TARGET ALARM LEVEL Select echo strength level that will trigger t
66. Activate acquisition zone SLEEP Sleep acquisition zone AZ boxes 2 Push the left button The AZ box now reads AZx SET Put the cursor on point A then push the left button 4 Put the cursor on point B then push the left button The AZ box now reads AZx WORK 3 14 2 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Target in acquision zone is red and flashing If you are setting a polygon acquisition zone with AZ2 set at least three points Push the right button to finish Note that the status indication should be WORK or SLEEP to set AZ2 When TT or AIS target enters the zone the indication TT NEW TARGET or AIS NEW TARGET appears in red in the Alert Box and the offending target flashes For the AIS all sleeping targets are changed to activated targets Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 If you wish to create an acquisition zone having a 360 degree coverage around own ship set point B in almost the same direction approx 3 as point A then push the left button Ifthe range scale is changed to less than half of the acquisition zone Azx x 1 or 2 OUT is shown in light blue in the AZ box If the left button is pushed in this state the acquisition zone goes into sleep state and the guidance box reads AZ WORK L DELETE The default acquisition zone is fan shaped It may also be a polygon having 3 10 points For details see section 3 14 5 If both acquisition zones are displayed maximum
67. BACKUP F KEY HOLD STORE L 3VRMTTG OFF 1 2 1 2 8 TEST 1 BACK 2 SELF TEST L 3 TT TEST 1 Not available on IMO or A type AP 5 APPENDIX Pop up menus of on screen boxes HDG MENU SPD MENU CURSOR MENU 1 HDG SOURCE 1 SHIP SPEED 21 AD 10 SERIAL LOG BT LOG WT TARGET DATA amp ACQ 2 GC 10 SETTING GPS MANUAL REF TARGET CANCEL 000 0 2 MANUAL SPEED TT TGT DATA amp ACQ 0 0kn TARGET TRACK ON 3 HDG menu 3 SET DRIFT TARGET TRACK OFF 3 OFF ON REF MARK EBL OFFSET OFFCENTER SPEED menu ZOOM MARK DELETE OWN TRACK DELETE TGT TRACK DELETE CHART ALIGN TRAIL ERASER 4 8 1 9 CURSOR 4 SMALL LARGE Not available on IMO type CURSOR menu OS POSN MENU TT TARGET MENU AIS TARGET MENU 1 NAV AID 1 TT SELECT 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS GPS1 GPS2 MANUAL 100 NO YES DEAD RECKONING AUTO 25 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS LAN AUTO 50 NO YES 2 MANUAL L L AUTO 75 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE 00 00 000 N AUTO 100 OFF ON 000 00 000 W 2 ALL CANCEL RECEIVED MESSAGES 3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT NO YES TRANSMIT MESSAGE OFFION OS POSN menu 3 REF TARGET VECTOR OFFION TT TARGET menu VOYAGE DATA STATIC DATA AIS ALM MESSAGES Q Y AIS TARGET menu 1 TRANSMIT MESSAGE BACK ADDRESS TYPE ADDRESSED BROADCAST MESSAGE TYPE SAFETY BINARY 4 MMSI NO 000000000 CHANNEL A B A or B
68. DIMMER 4 CHARACTER 5 CURSOR 6 7 TRAIL 8 HL SS 9 RING 0 NEXT BRILL menu page 1 PICTURE MENU 1 INT REJECT OFF 1 2 3 2 ECHO STRETCH OFF 1 2 3 3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF 1 2 3 4 NOISE REJ OFF ON 5 AUTO STC OFF ON 6 AUTO RAIN OFF 1 2 3 4 7 VIDEO CONTRAST 1 2 3 4 A B C 8 PULSE 9 CONDITION 0 DEFAULT NO SAVE FACTORY DEFAULT PICTURE menu ANT SELECT ANT NO 1 X BAND 12 MAIN TOP ANT NO 2 X BAND 12 MAIN TOP ANT NO 3 ANT NO 4 OWN RADAR NO 2 1 DISP ANT1 MASTER 2 DISP ANT2 MASTER 8 STORE INTER SW OFF ON 9 SUB MONITOR OFF ON ANTENNA SELECT menu BRILL1 MENU 2 2 1 BACK 2 BEARING CURSOR 3 EBL 4 VRM 5 PI LINE 6 TT SYMBOL 7 AIS SYMBOL 8 L L GRID lt 9 MARK 0 CHART BRILL menu page 2 PULSE MENU 1 BACK 2 0 5NM 81 52 3 0 75 81 52 1 4 1 5 S1 S2 M1 5 3NM S2 M1 M2 M3 6 6NM M1 M2 M3 L 7 12 24NM M2 M3 L PULSE menu APPENDIX MARK MENU ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 000 00 N 000 000 00 E MAP DISPLAY OFF ON MAP MARK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT MARK menu lt CONDITION MENU BACK 2 SEA CONDITION 1 2 3 4 5 ANT HEIGHT 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 25 30 35
69. E MAP DISPLAY OFF ON MAP MARK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT Not available on IMO or A type MARK menu 2 Select 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB then push the scrollwheel 3 Select GND or SEA as appropriate 4 Push the right button to close the menu Deleting individual origin marks The procedure below shows how to delete individual origin marks Note that origin marks cannot be deleted collectively 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display MARK DELETE EXIT in the guidance box goe o N DELETE EXIT Use the trackball to put the cursor on the origin mark you wish to erase Push the left button or the scrollwheel to erase the mark To erase another mark repeat steps 2 and 3 To finish push the right button when the guidance box reads MARK 1 57 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 33 1 58 Zoom The zoom function enlarges an area of interest as large as twice the normal viewing size in the text window To use the zoom display it must be turned on in the DATA BOX menu For further details see section 1 42 Zoom is not available when the tracked target data setting is LARGE 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display ZOOM EXIT in the guidance box 2 Use the trackball to select the location to zoom Push the left button or the scrollwheel A rectangle inscribes the location zoomed and the zoom display at the ri
70. FAR 21x7 BB 28x7 SERIES 1 Screen Raster scan daylight bright yellow or green echoes in 32 levels 2 Display FAR 2107 BB FAR 2107 FAR 2107 FAR 2807 series series series series Size model 17 inch color LCD 19 inch color LCD 20 1 inch color LCD 23 1 inch color LCD MU 170C MU 190 MU 201CR FAR 28x7 MU 231CR MU 231 Display area 338 x 270 376 32 x 301 06 399 36 x 319 49 470 4 x 352 8 mm Resolution 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200 pixels pixels pixels pixels Effective 260 mm 290 mm 308 mm 340 mm radar H 64 kHz H 64 kHz H 64 kHz V 60 H 75 kHz V 60 diameter V 60 Hz V 60 Hz Hz Hz Viewable 920 mm 1020 mm 1080 mm 1200 mm range 3 Minimum range 22m 4 Range discrimination 26 m 5 Range scales nm ring interval Range nm 0 125 0 25 05 075 15 2 4 6 8 12 Ring interval nm 0 025 0 05 01 025 025 05 05 1 1 2 2 No of rings 5 5 5 3 6 6 6 4 6 4 6 16 24 32 48 72 96 120 4 4 8 8 12 16 20 4 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 Range accuracy 1 of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10 m whichever 7 Bearing discrimination 8 Bearing accuracy 9 Presentation 10 Target tracking TT 11 AIS 12 Radar map 13 Acquisition zone 14 Interswitch function 4 INTERFACE 1 Heading signal input 2 Speed log 3 AIS is greater 2 0 SN36AF 1 m
71. JO o o o o o 0 08070304 0 0406973 0 04106355 0 04106355 0 02056855 0 00111154 0 00111154 0 00028325 5 Abbreviations Abbreviation 47 APPENDIX Automatic Identification System pon mma CrossingRange Jeco N Bow Grossingtine scr Night NORMA DoesPomoApman Gum Nwme NV GuwUp comseu ot O Course Overthe Ground cos foma OFSE Course Through the was cw Oo De omsp 05 hur lt G 1 E Fen Error ERROR Maritime Mobile Services Identity MMSI number Relative motos RM Revoutons Perminas Search ara Reso Son fse i ssa s Error Estimated Time of Arrival m gt External Fathom s February Feet Foot Full Full Gain 3 Global Positioning System Grid AP 48 APPENDIX Gn S gmdzme sw spo _ om smeiTwegntewas STW rom 777 96 5 SD _ re noma wo sm m ge mam wo usan _ asan N e megratea Seem mns Tmemcm interference Rejeoton
72. N x x M x x K hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Calculated wind angle relative to the vessel 0 to 180 left right L R of vessel heading 2 Calculated wind speed knots 3 Wind speed meters second 4 Wind speed Km Hr 5 Checksum WPL Waypoint location lt gt lt gt 1 Waypoint latitude N S 2 Waypoint longitude E W 3 Waypoint identifier 4 Checksum AP 20 ZDA Time and date ZDA hhmmss ss xx xx xxxx xx xx hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 UTC 2 Day 01 to 31 UTC 3 Month 01 to 12 UTC 4 Year UTC 5 Local zone hours 00h to 13h 6 Local zone minutes 00 to 59 as local hours 7 Checksum AIALR Set alarm state AIALR hhmmss ss xxx A A c c hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Time of alarm condition change UTC 2 Local alarm number identifier 3 Alarm condition A threshold exceeded V not exceeded 4 Alarm s acknowledge state A acknowledged V unacknowledged 5 Alarm s description text 6 Checksum AIVDM VHF data link message IAIVDM x x x a s s x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 1 o 1 Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message 1 to 9 2 Message sentence number 1 to 9 3 Sequential message identifier 0 to 9 4 AIS channel Number 5 Encapsulated ITU R M 1371 radio message 6 Number of fill bits 0 to 5 7 Checksum Message no 1 2 3 5 6 8 12 14 18 19 are used AP
73. OPERATION 1 47 1 47 1 1 47 2 1 94 Performance Monitor A performance monitor is required for a radar installed on vessels of 300 GT and upward engaged in international voyages Two units are available X band radar PM 31 9410 45 MHz S band radar PM 51 3050 30 MHz The performance monitor is incorporated in the antenna unit When the performance monitor is active the indication PM appears in yellow in the alarm box Activating deactivating the performance monitor 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 1 ECHO to open the ECHO menu ECHO 1 BACK 2 20 ECHO REJ OFF ON 3 TUNE INITIALIZE 4 PM OFF ON 5 SART OFF ON 6 WIPER OFF 1 2 7 ECHO AREA CIRCLE WIDE ALL 8 PICTURE SELECT 9 STC RANGE 00 Not available on IMO or A type ECHO menu 3 Select 4 PM 4 Select OFF or ON as appropriate 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu PM appears on the display when the performance monitor is active Checking radar performance 1 The radar is automatically set up as follows Range 24 nm Pulselength Long Shadow Sector Off SEA Off A C RAIN Off Echo Stretch Off Echo Average Off Interference Rej Off Video Contrast 4 B Tune Auto Gain Initial setting as set with PM GAIN ADJ at installation 1 RADAR OPERATION 2 Turn on the performance monitor referring to section 1 47 1 3 After observing the results turn off the performance monitor
74. OWN SHIP VECTOR 7 STERN UP 8 SHUTTLE FERRY Select how to cycle data when using the scrollwheel Key beeps when key sequence has been correctly executed Select function of keys F1 F4 on control unit Pop up guidance Select what the own ship vector displays Enables disables the stern up presentation mode Turns shuttle ferry mode on or off NORMAL Cycles numeral data in numeric order and indication data in clockwise order REVERSE Reverse of NORMAL OFF No key beep LO MID HI Loudness of key beep F KEY Operates as function key DISPLAY Control unit operates radar it is connected to You may turn the guidance off or on OFF No own ship vector HDG Vector shows heading direction COURSE Vector shows course ON Enables stern up mode OFF Disables stern up mode OFF Disables shuttle ferry mode MODE1 Head up picture is rotated 180 MODE2 Head up picture is rotated 180 and the gyro reading has 180 added to it or subtracted from it 1 44 1 RADAR OPERATION Alert Box When error or alarm setting violation is found the applicable indication appears red flashing in the Alert Box and the buzzer sounds The Alert Box is composed of four lines of information as shown below Silence the buzzer with the ALARM ACK key or select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button The buzzer and the flashing stop but the alarm indication remains on the display until t
75. SEA level indicator at the top of the display 3 While observing the A C SEA level indicator roll the scrollwheel downward to increase the SEA or upward to decrease it 100 levels 0 100 are available Manual reduction of sea clutter The A C SEA control reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges where clutter is the greatest and progressively increases amplification as the range increases so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter The proper setting of the A C SEA should be such that the clutter is broken up into small dots and small targets become distinguishable If the setting is set too low targets will be hidden in the clutter while if the setting is too high both sea clutter and targets will disappear from the display In most cases adjust the control until clutter has disappeared to leeward but a little is still visible windward Be careful not to remove all sea clutter because you may erase weak echoes Further the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A C SEA and A C RAIN to reduce clutter Sea clutter at A C SEA adjusted screen center sea clutter suppressed By keyboard 1 Select SEA MAN following the procedure in section 1 17 1 2 Watching the A C SEA level indicator at the top of the display adjust the A C SEA with the A C SEA control 100 levels 0 100 are available By trackball 1 Select SEA MAN following the procedure in s
76. SET BACK WPT NO SELECT 001 WPT NAME WPT L L CLEAR DATA WPT SET menu NO YES 5 19 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 10 2 5 20 2 9 Select 2 WPT NO SELECT Use the scrollwheel to select waypoint number Select location then push the scrollwheel to set To enter waypoint name follow the procedure below If you do not require waypoint name go to step 7 e Select 3 WPT NAME f Select alphanumeric character desired then push the scrollwheel g Repeat step 2 to complete the waypoint name You may use up to 15 alphanumeric characters for waypoint name Select 4 WPT L L Enter latitude and longitude position as follows a Select location desired then push the scrollwheel The scrollwheel may be pushed again to skip a place For input by keyboard press appropriate numeric keys then press the ENTER MARK key b To switch co ordinate polarity roll the scrollwheel or use the 2 key in case of keyboard operation To enter another waypoint repeat steps 4 8 10 Push the right button three times to close the menu Editing erasing waypoints from the menu You may edit or erase waypoints from the menu as follows You cannot erase or edit a waypoint that is part of a route that is currently in use Oh e Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 8 NAV LINE WPT Select 6 WPT SET Select 2 WPT NO SELECT Use the scrollwheel to enter waypoint number you wish to edit Then do on
77. When you selected an on screen box s option by rolling the scrollwheel the box and its contents turn light blue This simply indicates that the selected setting is different from the currently active setting To change the setting push the scrollwheel or the left button If neither the scrollwheel nor the left button is pushed within about 30 seconds after operating the scrollwheel the previous setting is automatically restored 1 RADAR OPERATION 3 The pop up menu attached to the MARK box is the MARK menu To open the menu push the right button The menu opens in the text area at the right side of the screen MARK MENU 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA 2 MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE 8 MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 000 00 N 000 000 00 E 9 MAP DISPLAY OFF ON 0 MAP MARK COLOR Not available on IMO RED GRN BLU YEL or A type CYA MAG WHT MARK menu Note Any menu may be operated from the full keyboard or with the trackball or a combination of the two in case of Control Unit RCU 014 Note that in later sections only the procedure for menu operation by the trackball is given 4 Select item desired Selected item is initially shown in reverse video and changes to normal video and circumscribed when the scrollwheel or the left button is pushed 5 Select option desired Selected option is initially shown in reverse video and
78. activated target 4 1 4 AIS OPERATION 4 2 Showing Hiding the AIS Display Left click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen to show or hide the AIS display and set display criteria DISP ALL All AIS targets received from the AIS transponder are displayed with symbols DISP FILT AIS targets are displayed according to the criteria set with AIS DISP FILTER on the AIS TT menu See section 4 3 for details DISP OFF All AIS symbols disappear but tracking continues internally 5 gt AIS DISP box When the AIS is turned on AIS targets are marked with appropriate AIS symbol as below SYMBOL STATUS REMARKS Activated All AIS symbols shown with thick line Color is selectable from menu ROT higher Displayed for turning ship than preset ROT Dangerous Displayed when CPA TCPA is within target CPA TCPA LIMIT Red in color Flashing until acknowledged Lost target X overlaid on a lost target Red in color Erased after acknowledged Target selected Broken square is overlaid on target for data display selected to display its data A B or C shown to indicate data box location at the right side of the screen AIS symbols Note 1 The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is switched off When the AIS is again turned on symbols are immediately displayed Note 2 You can turn the AIS display off by putting the cursor in the AIS box and long pushing
79. already displayed show a PI line referring to section 1 31 1 Use the trackball to place the arrow in the PI line orientation box PI 1 ON Roll the scrollwheel to adjust the PI PI line orientation 032 0 line orientation between PI line interval 5 60NM 000 0 359 9 T Enter a negative value to move the PI line to the opposite side of the PI line passing through the own ship position Use the trackball to put the cursor in the PI line interval box Roll the scrollwheel to adjust the PI line interval PI line bearing reference PI line bearing reference may be relative to own ship s heading Relative or referenced to North True as below 1 2 3 4 Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 MARK Select 4 PI LINE PI LINE BACK PI LINE BEARING REL TRUE PI LINE 1 2 3 6 PI LINE MODE PARALLEL PERPENDIC RESET PI LINE NO YES Select 2 PI LINE BEARING 5 Select REL or TRUE as appropriate 6 Push the right button twice to close the menu 1 53 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 31 4 1 31 5 1 31 6 1 54 Maximum number of PI lines to display The maximum number of PI lines to display may be selected from 1 2 3 or 6 lines as below The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line interval For the W specification radar you may specify the number of lines for two sets of PI lines the menu displays 4 PI LINE1 and 5 PI LINE2
80. and radiocommunication equipment and systems Shipborne radar Performance requirements methods of testing and required test results e Meets the requirements in IMO MSC 192 79 e Meets the requirements in IEC 62288 Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems Presentation of navigation related information on shipborne navigational displays General requirements methods of testing and required test results e Target alarm watches for targets entering or exiting an alarm zone e TCPA CPA alarms e Electronic parallel index lines e 42 rpm antenna for high speed craft Usage Limitations The FAR 2107_2807 series is designed to be used between 85 N and 85 S Accordingly features that function with latitude and longitude data AIS plotter etc become inoperative when the ship is higher than 85 N or 85 S with the exception of the cursor latitude and longitude display which is available between 85 N to 90 N Compliance with MED and R amp TTE Directive This radar compiles with MED 96 98 EC and its amendment 2002 75 EC of September 2 2002 and also complies with the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC In accordance with Article 6 3 of the above mentioned R amp TTE directive FURUNO intends to put this radar on the market of the following countries in EU as well other markets Austria Belgium Cyprus Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Malta Poland P
81. appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disappear even if there are targets They are however recognized if you understand the reason why they are displayed Typical false echoes are shown below Multiple echoes Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large ship bridge or breakwater A second a third or more echoes may be observed on the display at double triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown below Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain sensitivity or properly adjusting the A C SEA control True echo Target CW Sp Multiple echo Multiple echoes Sidelobe echoes Every time the radar pulse is transmitted some radiation escapes on each side of the beam called sidelobes If a target exists where it can be detected by the side lobes as well as the main lobe the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range Side lobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong targets They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A C SEA control Spurious Target Sidelobe echoes 2 3 2 RADAR OBSERVATION Virtual image A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions on the screen One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other
82. are selected the mean value is used for stabilization and speed 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display REF MARK EXIT in the guidance box 2 Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0 2 to 24 nm from own ship 3 3 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 4 3 Push the left button to enter the reference mark The reference target mark see below appears at the cursor position and the own ship position data label changes from LOG NAV or MANUAL to REF Note that it takes three minutes before a new speed is displayed If tracking has failed for a reference target the target is marked with a lost target mark symbol formed with two triangles ye s sx _ 2 Changes to C in three minutes R1 R1 Reference target 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to continue entering reference marks Three may be entered Notes on speed input by reference target e Reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed e Do not use reference target generated true speed to calculate relative speed Relative speed data is not accurate because response to speed change is slow hampering the TT s ability to accurately judge the possibility of collision e Select a stationary target as a reference target to calculate own ship speed as ground tracking speed Do not choose a moving target as a reference target A moving target produces error in the vector for TT and AIS
83. clutter control not Improper setting of A C SEA If A C SEA range functioning properly is seen only at very close range suspect inaccurate frequency of reference oscillator True motion presentation 1 Poor contact of MODE 1 Try to press MODE key a little not working correctly key full keyboard harder 2 Selection not accessed 2 Press MODE key or operate PRESENTATION MODE box until TM appears 3 Speed entry incorrect 3 Enter correct own ship speed referring to section 1 13 4 TM display inaccurate 4 Make sure that speed and compass inputs are accurate Target not tracked Poor definition of targets in Adjust A C SEA and A C RAIN controls sea clutter referring to section 1 17 and 1 18 Buttons on trackball Trackball module Replace trackball module module operated but no response 6 9 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 8 6 10 Diagnostics A diagnostic test program is provided to test major circuit boards in the control unit processor unit and card I F unit Note that the normal radar picture is lost during this test Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic test 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 9 CUSTOMIZE TEST CUSTOMIZE TEST BACK DATA BOX F 1 F2 F3 F4 OPERATION TEST O1 Q N CUSTOMIZE TEST menu 3 Select 8 TEST TEST 1 BACK 2 SELF TEST 3 TT TEST TEST menu 4 Select 2 SELF TEST SELF T
84. default picture setup 1 66 1 35 5 Disabling unnecessary picture 1 67 1 36 Function Keys 1 68 1 36 1 Activating function keys I bene n iani dae 1 68 1 36 2 Programming function tue ubere edt Era dude 1 68 SSNPS POSION P EE 1 72 1 38 Second tr ce ete Le eese eii a ien as 1 74 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 39 Bnlliarieg of Screen ror etse posture 1 75 1 40 Watch Alarm u HI 1 76 uyu anna 1 77 142 EP 1 79 TAS C stomizing rae ON se rtu x eade 1 81 UON Hc PE 1 83 1 44 1 Alarm description 1202 0 20 1 84 air EET 1 87 1 44 3 Outputting alarm signals teer teet et itr 1 88 1344 4 Primary g iSo RES CERA ES REN MAU 1 89 1 45 InterswitCh 1 90 1 45 1 Displaying antenna information 22 22 11111 44 1 90 1 45 2 Presetting antenna and display combinations
85. find the relationship between your ship and other ships against your planned maneuver Further set CPA and TCPA values to find possible collision situations Enter various courses and speeds until a dangerous situation is resolved The trial manuever feature proceeds without interrupting the updating of target information For more accurate results use relative motion and sea stabilization ground tracking and be sure that own ship s characteristics such as acceleration and turning performance have been properly set in the initial settings during the installation Take into consideration own ship s maneuvering characteristics such as rudder delay turning delay and acceleration delay This is particularly important on large vessels Types of trial maneuvers There are two types of trial maneuvers static and dynamic Dynamic trial maneuver A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and own ship You enter own ship s intended speed and course with a certain delay time Assuming that all tracked targets maintain their present speeds and courses the targets and own ship s Delay time 2 m 30s Present own future movements are simulated in ship position one second increments indicating their predicted positions in 30 second intervals as illustrated below The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when own ship will actually start to change her sp
86. if a liquid spills into the equipment Do not operate the equipment with wet hands Electrical shock can result Before servicing the radar turn off the appropriate external breaker Power is not removed from the radar simply by turning off its power switch SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS A WARNING No one navigational aid should be relied upon for the safety of vessel and crew The navigator has the responsibility to check all aids available to confirm position Electronic aids are not a substitute for basic navigational principles and common sense e This TT automatically tracks automatically or manually acquired radar targets and calculates their courses and speeds indicating them by vectors Since the data generated by the auto plotter are based on what radar targets are selected the radar must always be optimally tuned for use with the auto plotter to ensure required targets will not be lost or unwanted targets such as sea returns and noise will not be acquired and tracked e A target does not always mean a land mass reef ships or other surface vessels but can imply returns from sea surface and clutter As the level of clutter changes with environment the operator should properly adjust the A C SEA A C RAIN and GAIN controls to be sure target echoes are not eliminated from the radar screen WARNING LABEL Warning labels are attached to the equipment Do not remove any label If a label is missing or damage
87. in some targets not being acquired at long distance TT display will be missing on one or more targets that could only be visible if the radar sensitivity control GAIN control were increased The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once Automatic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5 7 times continuously Tracking is achieved when the target is detected five times not necessarily continuously out of 10 scans If not detected six times out of 10 scans the target will become a lost target The TT will acquire a radar echo that is present once in every six antenna scans and continue tracking if 1 in 10 Second trace echoes When the radar beam is super refracted strong echoes may be received at such long ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted pulse This gives an incorrect range indication Second and third trace echoes can be tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking criteria but target course and speed data will be in error 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Blind and shadow sectors Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard ship for example funnels and masts in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar beam intensity in that particular direction Th
88. information shall be considered as two distinct targets One activated AIS target and one tracked radar target shall be displayed 1 Confirm that the TT ACQ MODE box shows AUTO AUTO MAN or MAN 2 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 3 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu 4 Select 0 ASSOCIATION to show the ASSOCATION menu shown right ASSOCIATION BACK 2 ASSOCIATION TARGET OFF AIS TT GAP 0 050NM RANGE 0 100NM BEARING 9 9 SPEED 6 0kn COURSE 25 0 5 Select ASSOCIATION TARGET 6 Select OFF AIS or TT as applicable to select which symbols and data to show when association criteria is met OFF Turn off association AIS Use AIS symbols and AIS data TT Use TT symbols and TT data 4 19 4 AIS OPERATION 4 20 Note Association can also be switched on and off from the screen by left clicking the Association Usage icon shown below Association Usage gt Use TT symbols and data lt Use AIS symbols and data No indication Assocation OFF lt JAI Fir VECTOR REL 30M PAST POSN REL 3M CPA LIMIT 0 SNM 22MIN CPA AUTO ACTIVATE OFF LOST TARGET ALARM OFF TARGET CURSOR DATA amp ACQ MENU 7 Enter the information below pushing the scrollwheel or the MARK ENTER key after entering each data This information will be used to determine which tracked targets to convert GAP Enter the range in bearing direction between A
89. is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment However no machine can perform its intended function unless installed operated and maintained properly Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation and maintenance We would appreciate hearing from you the end user about whether we are achieving our purposes Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment Features e High resolution 19 inch FAR 2107 20 1 inch LCD FAR 2107 BB or 23 1 inch LCD FAR 2807 e This series of radar and TT Target Tracking are available in the models shown in the table below BB indicates blackbox configuration monitor to be supplied locally is available Output TR lt TR 2117 12 kW FAR 2137S 30 kW FAR 2117 BB FAR 2137S BB FAR 2817 FAR 2837S FAR 2127 25 kW FAR 2837SW 30 kW DOWN FAR 2127 BB FAR 2827 FAR 282 W 25 kW DOWN Xi FOREWORD e Two types of trackball equipped control units are available RCU 014 full keyboard and the RCU 015 palm control The trackball is easy to use thanks to the ergonomically designed palm rest e Simplified operation with point and click menu operation e All functions are accessible by using the trackball alone e Applicable to HSC High Speed Craft e TT AIS Radar Plotter and Interswitch supplied as standard e Meets the requirements in IEC 62388 Maritime navigation
90. is lowered more slowly in 2 Condition B Echo averaging is automatically activated when the wiper feature is turned on allowing you to instantly see how the picture is affected with echo averaging turned off and turned on To activate the wiper feature do the following 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 1 ECHO to open the ECHO menu ECHO BACK 2 2ND ECHO REJ OFF ON TUNE INITIALIZE ECHO AREA Not available on IMO or A type CIRCLE WIDE ALL PICTURE SELECT STC RANGE 00 ECHO menu 3 Select 6 WIPER 4 Select OFF 1 or 2 as appropriate 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 1 30 1 30 1 Target Trails The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be displayed in the form of synthetic afterglow Target trails are shown either relative or true and may be sea or ground stabilized True motion trails require a compass signal and position and speed data True or relative trails You may display echo trails in true or relative motion Relative trails show relative movements between targets and own ship True motion trails present true target movements in accordance with their over the ground speeds and courses Note When true trail is selected on the RM mode the TRAIL MODE box is shown in blue The reference for the past position displays for AIS and TT is also switched whenever trail reference is switched 1 RADAR OPERATION a True target trails No s
91. its speed the spacing will be uneven If it changes course its plotted course will not be a straight line Note that AIS past positions will be shown if TARGET TRACK on the DISPLAY sub menu of the PLOTTER menu is ON regardless of whether AUTO TARGET TRACK on the PLOTTER menu is turned ON or OFF Below are sample past position displays i 7 7 7 a Ship turning b Ship running c Ship reduced d Ship increased straight speed speed Sample past position displays 4 9 1 Past position plot interval Left click the PAST POSN box at the right side of the screen to select plot interval desired OFF 30 s 1 2 3 or 6 min Select OFF to erase all past position points and turn off the past position display PAST POSN REL 2MIN PAST POSN box 4 12 4 9 2 4 9 3 4 9 4 4 AIS OPERATION Past position points You may select the number of past position points to show per plot interval as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu 3 Select 5 TT AIS SYMBOL TT AIS SYMBOL BACK 2 TT AIS SYMBOL COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT AIS ROT TAG LIMIT 000 0 MIN TT PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS SCALED SYMBOL OFF ON Not available on IMO type AlS SYMBOL menu 4 Select 5AIS PAST POSN POINTS 5 Select 5 or 10 as appropriate 6 Push the right button three times to close the menu P
92. menu to select a display mode Note 2 IMO type radar can display own ship s track and L L grid on the PLOTTER display Note 3 The anchor watch as well as AIS is active in standby 5 1 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Sample video plotter displa Past position Separation zone AIS and TT Waypoint Navline Tracked Target Own ship safe contour Planned route Heading line AlS activated Own ship target vector Approximate Dangerous side of coastline own ship safe contour may look like this hatched line Video plotter display 5 3 Presentation Modes Five presentation modes are available North up Course up Head up Head up TB True Bearing Stern up and North up TM True Motion To select a mode use the MODE key or select the PRESENTATION MODE box then push the left button For a description of the presentation modes see section 1 12 Note 1 Chart data is not displayed on the HEAD UP and HEAD UP TB modes Note 2 The screen may flash when the heading is changed more than one degree in the HEAD UP or HEAD UP TB mode Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode In the true motion mode the own ship mark is automatically returned sternward 75 from the screen center when it reaches a location 50 of the display radius 5 2 5 4 5 4 1 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Radar Map A radar map is a combination of map lines and symbols whereby the user can defi
93. mode HH 3 19 3 11 4 Stabilization in true mode ten te HO E UE 3 20 9 12 Set and MEN ES 3 20 3 13 T T Gollisiori Alarm CPA TOPA iaceo SERRE Me tot aiai denne rone 3 21 3 13 1 Setting the CPA and ranges eene nnne 3 21 3 13 2 Acknowledging the TT collision alarm 3 22 3 14 Acquisition Zone rte re E i Fr ERR Ea Aa 3 22 3 14 1 Activating an acquisition 2 3 22 3 14 2 Sleeping deactivating an acquisition zone 3 23 3 14 3 Acknowledging the alarm 3 23 3 14 4 Acquisition zone 3 24 3 14 5 Acquisition zone shape and stabilization 3 24 3 19 TT Systemr M ssSageS pr d 3 25 3 16 Trial Maneuver ee REIR Ce E POSEE HE ele 3 26 3 16 1 Types of trial Maneuvers esee 3 26 3 16 2 Performing a trial maneuver ig egeret eei en ou 3 27 3 16 9 Terminating a trial maneuver eee te pite oo tds 3 29 3 47 ha Performance Test C PPP 3 30 3 18 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking
94. of four polygon points are shown TT and AIS are automatically set to TT AUTO and AIS DISP respectively when an AZ is activated in the following conditions TT TT OFF or TT MANUAL 100 AIS AIS FUNC OFF or AIS DISP OFF Sleeping deactivating an acquisition zone 1 Select the appropriate AZ box 2 Sleep or deactivate the alarm zone as appropriate Sleep alarm zone Push the left button to remove the acquisition zone from the screen The indication in the AZ box changes from AZx WORK to AZx SLEEP To reactivate and display the acquisition zone repeat this procedure to display AZx WORK Deactivate alarm zone Push and hold down the left button until the AZ box goes blank 3 14 3 Acknowledging the alarm Press the ALARM ACK key or select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button to acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer 3 23 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 14 4 Acquisition zone reference 3 14 5 3 24 The acquisition zone may be referenced to heading or North as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu TT AIS BACK 2 AZ STAB STAB HDG STAB NORTH AZ POLYGON OFF STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH TRIAL MANEUVER TT AIS SYMBOL CPAAUTO ACTIVATE AIS DISP FILTER AIS LOST FILTER OFF ON TT LOST FILTER ASSOCIATION 1 menu Select 2 AZ STAB 4 Select STAB STAB NORTH appropriate STAB HDG Acquisi
95. or TUNE MAN at the top of the screen Tuning bar Place arrow inside box to adjust tuning when TUNE MAN is selected Tuning method AUTO or MAN gt TUNE AUTO Tuning level TUNE box 2 Push the left button or scrollwheel to display TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN as appropriate 3 If you used the scrollwheel to select tuning method push the scrollwheel or the left button to change setting Initializing tuning Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation However if you feel that automatic tuning is not working properly try re initializing it as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 1 ECHO ECHO BACK 2 2 ECHO REJ OFF ON 3 TUNE INITIALIZE 4 PM OFF ON 5 SART OFF ON 6 WIPER OFF 1 2 ECHO AREA 2 CIRCLE WIDE ALL PICTURE SELECT STC RANGE 00 N 1 Not available on FAR 2157 2167DS 2 Not available on IMO or A type 3 Select 3 TUNE INITIALIZE For operation from the keyboard press the ENTER MARK key WARNING TUNE INITIALIZE appears in the Alert Box during the initialization 4 Push the right button twice to close the menu 1 15 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 10 3 1 10 4 1 11 Automatic tuning Select automatic tuning following section 1 10 1 The box shows TUNE AUTO Manual tuning 1 Select the 48 mile range from the RANGE box Push the left button to lower the range the right button to r
96. picture freeze 30 operation seconds after the picture freezes the buzzer sounds the ALARM ACK key blinks and alarm signal is output Power is ON but Brilliance is too low Keyboard type control unit Turn BRILL control nothing appears on clockwise to increase the brilliance monitor Trackball type control unit Press any one of F1 F4 for five seconds to increase the brilliance to 50 Marks indications and Tx high voltage Reset the power to restore normal operation noise appear but no protection circuit has activated Defective range key to hit RANGE and keys or RANGE box several times If unsuccessful replacement of keypad may be required in case of the keyboard type control unit If that does not work try to turn the power off and on again to see if the problem might be video freeze up Only 2 PI lines when 6 Incorrect setting of Incorrect setting of PI line interval Adjust PI line lines are wanted PI line interval interval referring to section 1 31 2 Also the setting for number of PI lines to display may be inappropriate Check the menu setting for number of PI lines referring to section 1 31 4 Range rings are not Range rings turned Try turning on the range rings with 0 RINGS in the displayed MARK menu If they do not appear their brilliance may be too low Adjust their brilliance at page 1 of the BRILL menu Tracked target not Poor definition of Adjust A C SEA and A C RAIN refe
97. radar starts up properly Note 2 Parameters set on the menus are stored in a non volatile memory flash memory and are preserved when the power is turned off Transmitter ON After the power is turned on and the magnetron has warmed up ST BY appears at the screen center meaning the radar is ready to transmit radar pulses You may transmit by pressing the STBY TX key on the full keyboard or use the trackball to select the TX STBY box at the bottom left corner of the display then push the left button above the trackball The label at the left hand side of the guidance box at the bottom right corner of the screen changes from TX to STBY TX 22201 5 STBY Guidance box t TX STBY box Radar display 1 1 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 2 The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse length Other settings such as brilliance levels VRMs EBLs and menu option selections are also set to previous settings The STBY TX key or TX STBY box toggles the radar between STBY and TRANSMIT status The antenna stops in stand by and rotates in transmit The magnetron ages with time resulting in a reduction of output power Therefore it is highly recommended that the radar be set to stand by when not used for an extended period of time How to stop antenna rotation Antenna rotation can be stopped One method is to turn off the antenna switch on the radar The other method is to stop ro
98. same bearing and close to each other This is determined by pulselength only Practically a 0 08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimination better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors having an echoing area of 10 m7 Bearing accuracy One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a target can be measured The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on the narrowness of the radar beam However the bearing is usually taken relative to the ship s heading and thus proper adjustment of the heading line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy To minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target put the target echo at the extreme position on the screen by selecting a suitable range Range measurement Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the radar Generally there are two means of measuring range the fixed range rings and the variable range marker VRM The fixed range rings appear on the screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range to a target The variable range marker s diameter is increased or decreased so that the marker touches the inner edge of the target allowing the operator to obtain more accurate range measurements 2 2 2 RADAR OBSERVATION False Echoes Occasionally echo signals
99. scrollwheel Push the right button to close the menu 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 35 5 Disabling unnecessary picture setups There are quite a few picture setups from which to select some which you may not require You can disable unnecessary ones as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 1 ECHO 3 Select 8 PICTURE SELECT PICTURE SELECT BACK 2 PICTURE SELECT PICTURE1 OFF ON PICTURE2 OFF ON PICTURE3 OFF ON PICTURE4 OFF ON NEAR OFF ON FAR OFF ON NEAR BUOY OFF ON FAR BUOY OFF ON ROUGH SEA OFF ON SHIP OFF ON HARBOR OFF ON COAST OFF ON Select 2 PICTURE SELECT Select the picture setup you wish to disable and push the left button Select OFF or ON as applicable and push the left button Push the right button twice to close the menu O gt d 1 67 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 36 1 36 1 1 36 2 1 68 Function Keys Less often used functions are provided in the menu To avoid opening the menus to set up the radar for a particular situation function keys F1 F4 may be assigned any of the functions shown in the CUSTOMIZE TEST sub menu Activating function keys To activate the function assigned to a function key press the key to instantly set the radar for the preset purpose Further press the key to select option Function key Default setting Interference Rejector Echo Stretch Heading Line Off Programming function keys Do the following to program the fu
100. suspended and the indication S appears at the bottom of the effective display area during the test The test may be terminated at any time 1 Right click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 9 CUSTOMIZE TEST CUSTOMIZE TEST BACK DATA BOX F 1 F2 F3 F4 OPERATION TEST O Q N CUSTOMIZE TEST menu 3 Select 8 TEST TEST 1 BACK 2 SELF TEST 3 TT TEST TEST menu 4 Select 2 TT TEST START TT TEST 1 BACK 2 TT TEST START NOTE THE DISPLAY IS CLEARER WHEN RUNNING TT TEST RUN TT TEST YES SELECT 2 START NO SELECT 1 BACK TT TEST menu 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 5 Select 2 TT TEST START then push the left button to start the test An alert S flickers during the test Approx 10 minutes to complete the test scenario The test does not require echo gyro or log signals Gyro required if TT W O GYRO setting is OFF 6 Acquire all three targets The simulated movement of three targets automatically runs ten minutes and repeats The courses and speeds for the targets are as shown in the table below 7 Put the cursor on target A then push the TARGET DATA key Target data appears at the right side of the display 8 Confirm that test data displayed for target A matches the data shown in the table below Range bearing and TCPA change over time 9 Confirm that data for target B and C 10 To terminate the test press the STBY TX key or sel
101. the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs If the accuracy seems unsatisfactory enter set and drift corrections Note that set and drift cannot be used on the IMO radar when the radar is displaying AIS targets 3 10 2 3 TARGET TRACKING TT True vector Own ship and other ship s move on the display at their true speeds and courses This mode is useful for distinguishing moving targets from stationary ones Buoy Own ship True vectors in Relative vectors in head up mode head up mode True and relative vectors Relative vector Other ships move relative to your ship This mode is useful for finding ships on collision course with your ship A ship whose vector passes through your ship s position is on a collision course Vector mode and length Vectors may be displayed in true or relative mode Vector time or the length of vectors can be set between 1 and 60 minutes By keyboard 1 Press the VECTOR MODE key consecutively to select relative or true vector mode Your selection is shown on the vector motion box Note that this also selects the vector mode for the past position display 2 Press the VECTOR TIME key consecutively to select vector time Your selection appears in the vector time box see illustration below By trackball 1 Use the trackball to select VECTOR TRUE S or G or VECTOR REL whichever is displayed at the right side of the screen Vector mode
102. the TT AIS menu TT AIS MENU BACK 2 AZ STAB STAB HDG STAB NORTH AZ POLYGON OFF STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH TRIAL MANEUVER TT AIS SYMBOL CPA AUTO ACTIVATE AIS DISP FILTER AIS LOST FILTER TT LOST FILTER ASSOCIATION TT AIS menu 3 Select 7 AIS DISP FILTER AIS DISP FILTER If the AIS DISP box is operated BACK when all settings on this menu are MAX RANGE set for OFF the setting of the AIS OFF ON DISP box becomes DISP ALL ONM MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 0 0kn EXCEPT CLASS B OFF ON MIN SHIP LENGTH OFF ON OM AIS DISP FILTER menu 4 Set items 2 5 referring to the description below MAX RANGE Any AIS target beyond the range set here will not be shown MIN SHIP SPEED Any AIS target slower than this setting will not be shown EXCEPT CLASS B Select ON to remove Class B AIS targets MIN SHIP LENGTH Any AIS target whose length is shorter than this setting will not be shown 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 6 Select DISP FILT from the AIS DISP box Note An AIS target whose data is currently displayed is not affected by the filter setting 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 AIS OPERATION Activating Targets When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target that target s course and speed are shown with a vector You can easily judge target movement by monitoring the vector Sleeping targets within an acquisition zone are automatically changed to activated
103. the cursor on a desired tracked target then push the left button 3 To erase target s data from the data box select the target on the radar display then push the left button Target data display is as below RNG BRG Range and bearing from own ship to the selected target with suffix T True or R Relative COG SOG in case of GPS Course and speed are displayed for the selected target with suffix T True or R relative CSE STW are shown for manual speed and speed through the water CPA TCPA CPA Closest Point of Approach is the closest range a target will approach to own ship TCPA is the time to CPA Both CPA and TCPA are automatically calculated When the CPA has passed clear of own ship it is indicated by a TCPA with a negative sign TCPA is counted to 99 9 min and beyond this it is indicate as TCPA gt 99 9MIN BCR BCT BCR is the closest range at which the selected target is predicted to cross your ship s bow BCT is the time at which the selected target is predicted to cross your ship s bow 3 13 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 14 Target selected for data readout 350 000 010 330 TT TARGET No 01 BRG 25 5 T RNG 3 4NM T COG 205 1 T T SOG 12 3KN CPA 2 9 TCPA 12 2MIN BCR 1 7 BCT 20MIN Uy 220 lin 7 0 1 CSE and STW are shown BRG Bearing from own ship to target in case of manual speed in R Relative or T True speed through th
104. the left button to Show FUNC OFF Data processing is terminated Note 3 AIS symbols are momentarily erased and the screen is redrawn after the heading is changed in the head up mode Note 4 When no AIS data is received the message RECEIVE appears in the Alert Box Check the AIS transponder 4 AIS OPERATION Note 5 AIS symbols are shown in dotted lines in the following cases No water or ground tracking speed of your ship or there is no speed data All AIS symbols are shown in dotted lines and the message NO for AIS appears in red in the Alert Box No water or ground tracking speed received from AIS target or no speed data from AIS target The symbol of the corresponding AIS target is shown in dotted lines Note 6 Other AIS symbols that may appear are shown in the table below Symbol Meaning Real AIS AtoN Virtual AIS AtoN Base Station Airborne SAR aircraft AIS SART e lt gt 765 Note 7 The CPA and TCPA of SAR aircraft data are not available and are shown as 4 3 4 AIS OPERATION 4 3 AIS Display Filter If there are too many AIS targets on the screen you may wish to remove unnecessary ones You may remove targets by distance from own ship speed class and length For example you might want to remove slow moving targets as they normally do not require close monitoring 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open
105. transmits it with the intention of making the target s signal look larger on a radar display The RTE is available in X band and S band types TARGET TRACKING TT 3 1 Usage Precautions A WARNING No one navigational aid should be relied upon for the safety of vessel and crew The navigator has the responsibility to check all aids available to confirm position Electronic aids are not a substitute for basic navigational principles and common sense e This TT automatically tracks automatically or manually acquired radar targets and calculates their courses and speeds indicating them by vectors Since the data generated by the auto plotter are based on what radar targets are selected the radar must always be optimally tuned for use with the auto plotter to ensure required targets will not be lost or unwanted targets such as sea returns and noise will not be acquired and tracked e A target does not always mean a land mass reef ships or other surface vessels but can imply returns from sea surface and clutter As the level of clutter changes with environment the operator should properly adjust the A C SEA A C RAIN and GAIN controls to be sure target echoes are not eliminated from the radar screen A CAUTION The plotting accuracy and response of this TT meets IMO standards Tracking accuracy is affected by the following e Tracking accuracy is affected by course change One to two minutes is required to
106. wish to enter For example if you want to enter waypoint number 59 select WPT 51 100 5 Push the right button to close the menu The guidance box now reads MARK SELECT MARK MENU 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 6 With the MARK box selected roll the scrollwheel to display waypoint number desired then push the left button The cursor jumps into the effective display area and the guidance box reads MARK EXIT 7 Use the trackball to put the cursor where you want to inscribe a waypoint mark then push the left button to inscribe the mark The waypoint mark O waypoint number appears at the location selected You can see the range and bearing to the cursor location by monitoring the mark range and bearing indication just below the MARK box e To enter another waypoint push the right button when the guidance box reads MARK EXIT then repeat steps 6 8 WPT should be selected on the MARK menu e To quit entering waypoints push the right button when the guidance box reads MARK EXIT Entering waypoints by manual input of latitude and longitude 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 8 NAV LINE WPT NAV LINE WPT 1 2 BACK 2 NAV LINE DATA OFF EXT DATA INTERNAL DATA WPT MARK NAV LINE SELECT FORWARD REVERSE SKIP NEXT WPT NAV LINE WIDTH 9 99NM WPT SET WPT LIST NAV LINE SET NAV LINE LIST NEXT Not available on IMO type NAV LINE WPT menu 3 Select 6 WPT SET WPT
107. 0 00 DELAY 00 30 86 8 T 06 5kn 4 Trial time Delay time for trial maneuver Course for trial maneuver Speed for trial maneuver Boxes for setting trial maneuver parameters 10 Use the scrollwheel to set delay time at DELAY This is the time after which own ship takes a new situation not the time the simulation begins Change the delay time according to own ship loading condition etc Use the scrollwheel to set the delay time 11 Select the course setting box Use the scrollwheel to set the course 3 28 3 16 3 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 12 Select the speed setting box Use the scrollwheel to set the speed Note Course and speed may also be set with the EBL and VRM respectively Put the cursor in any one of the four trial maneuver related boxes and operate applicable control 13 Select TRIAL SET Push the left button or the scrollwheel The TRIAL box shows TRAIL 00 00 00 00 is trial maneuver time The time indication depends on trial mode Dynamic mode The position of your ship and tracked targets is updated and displayed every 30 seconds Static mode The position of your ship and tracked targets when set course and speed are reached are displayed The progress time until the position is reached is indicated on the display The trial time can be changed from the Trial Time box Put the cursor in the Trial Time box and roll the scrollwheel The position of targets a
108. 00 Track Control Unit Dockyard supply 1 L Category of Units Y Antenna unit Exposed to weather Memory Card Memory n All other units Protected from weather Interface Unit ees CU 00 Max 2 total lt ET AC spec 1 Transformer Unit 1 1 RU 1803 aaa eee a J 100 115 VAC 440 220 230 1 50 60 Hz 1 50 60 Hz XX 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 1 1 2 Turning on the Power The POWER switch is located at the left corner of the control unit Open the POWER switch cover and press the switch to turn on the radar system To turn off the radar press the switch again The screen shows the bearing scale and digital timer approximately 30 seconds after power on The timer counts down three minutes of warm up time During this period the magnetron transmitter tube is warmed for transmission When the timer has reached 0 00 the indication ST BY appears at the screen center meaning the radar is now ready to transmit pulses In the stand by condition markers rings map charts etc are not shown Further TT and AIS are not shown In the warm up and stand by conditions ON TIME and TX TIME count in hours and tenths of hour appear at the screen center Note 1 Do not turn the power on directly after it has been turned off Wait several seconds before you reapply the power to be sure the
109. 00 00 N 000 000 00 E MAP DISPLAY OFF ON MAP MARK COLOR Not available on IMO RED GRN BLU YEL or A type CYA MAG WHT MARK menu Select 2 4 Select OWN SHIP SHAPE On the W type the indication OS appears to the right of the MARK box RC 5 Push the right button to close the menu 09 03 6 Use the trackball to select the own ship symbol at the bottom left corner 08 04 7 Roll the scrollwheel to select the point number for which you want to change its position See figure at right LET 95 8 Push the left button The cursor positions at the point number selected 9 Use the trackball to drag the point to location desired 10 Push the left button to confirm selected location 11 Repeat steps 6 10 continue changing symbol shape 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 49 Color and Brilliance Sets This radar provides six sets of color and brilliance sets to match any ambient lighting condition 1 49 1 Selecting color and brilliance set Left click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen to select color and brilliance set from among BRILL1 BRILL4 The default specifications of each brilliance set are is in the table below TEXT PALETTE BRILL PANEL OTHERS COLOR BKGD CIRCLE 1 49 2 Presetting color and brilliance set 1 Right click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen to open the BRILL menu BRILL1 MENU 1 2 ECHO COLOR YEL GRN WHT COLOR PALETTE DAY GRY DAY BLU DUSK GRY DUSK BLU
110. 1 26 6 AUTO RAIN 1 18 3 ECHO AVERAGE 1 27 8 PULSE 1 15 4 NOISE REJ 1 28 4 Select 7 VIDEO CONTRAST 5 Select 1 2 3 or 4 Dynamic Range or A B C Curve as appropriate Refer to the description below and the illustration on the next page 1 4 Control dynamic range 1 provides the widest dynamic range 4 is the narrowest dynamic range A Mid level in the curve is low so this setting is suitable for reducing rain clutter B Curve between A and C C Mid level in the curve is high so this setting is suitable for detecting distant targets 4 3 PICTURE level 7db Default 11 db VIDEO SIGNAL level Video contrast settings 6 Select 9 CONDITION then push the scrollwheel to show the CONDITION menu CONDITION MENU 1 BACK 2 SEA CONDITION 1 2 3 4 5 3 ANT HEIGHT 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 more50m 4 LOW LEVEL ECHO 0 CONDITION menu 7 Select 2 SEA CONDITION 8 Select appropriate sea condition The larger the number the rougher the sea state 1 65 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 35 3 1 35 4 1 66 9 Select 3 ANT HEIGHT 10 Select appropriate radar antenna height above the waterline 11 If necessary open the menu select the ECHO menu and 9 STC RANGE to adjust effective STC range The setting range is 10 to 10 The larger the number the longer the effective STC range becomes Roll the scrollwheel to set Note that the keyboard cannot be used to enter the setting
111. 1 or VRM2 VRM1 box whichever VRM you want to use 2 The guidance box reads VRM ON Push the left button to turn on the VRM The guidance box now reads VRM SET L DELETE 3 Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display area The guidance box now reads VRM FIX EXIT 4 Use the trackball coarse adjustment or scrollwheel fine adjustment to align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the lower right corner of the screen Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the RANGE key This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale 5 Push the left button to anchor the VRM and fix its readout or push the right button to return the VRM to its previous location range 6 To erase a VRM select the appropriate VRM readout box then push the left button until the VRM disappears from the screen VRM2 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 19 3 VRM unit of measurement and C types 1 19 4 SEM P oo II Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 MARK Select 9 EBL VRM CURSOR SET then push the scrollwheel Select VRM1 or VRM2 as appropriate and push the scrollwheel Select unit of measurement desired then push the scrollwheel Push the right button twice to close the menu TTG to VRM indication You can show the TTG to VRMs as foll
112. 19 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 11 4 3 12 3 20 Stabilization in true mode The true mode past position display may be ground stabilized or sea stabilized The PAST POSN box shows current stabilization as TRUE G or TRUE S To change stabilization mode open the SPEED menu and set SHIP SPEED to BT ground stabilization or WT sea stabilization Set and Drift Set the direction in which a water current flows can be manually entered in 0 1 degree steps Drift in another word Rate the speed of tide can also be entered manually in 0 1 knot steps When course through water and speed through water are available activate set and drift to get course over ground and speed over ground Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and target data Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information These values are applied to all targets If stationary targets have vectors set and drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors To enter set and drift do the following SPEED MENU 1 Right click the SPD box to show the SPEED 1 SHIP SPEED menu LOG BT LOG WT 2 Select 3 SET DRIFT 3 Select 0 0kn 4 Push the right button to close the menu Then 3 SET DRIFT the SET and DRIFT boxes appear at the top OFFION of the display 5 Select the SET box 6 Use the scrollwheel to set value rolling it to select SET 66 8 numeral and pushing it to s
113. 2 or DEAD RECKONING as appropriate GPS1 GPS navigator connected to nav port GPS2 GPS navigator connected to SPEED LOG port or TRACK CONTROL port 1 72 4 5 6 1 RADAR OPERATION If you have selected DEAD RECKONING do the following to enter position manually For GPS1 or GPS2 go to step 6 a Select 2 MANUAL L L then push the scrollwheel Enter latitude and longitude position as follows b Roll the scrollwheel to set appropriate digit in the latitude field then push the scrollwheel You may push the scrollwheel again to skip a place For keyboard operation press appropriate numeric keys then press the ENTER MARK key c Set longitude similar to how you set latitude then push the scrollwheel For keyboard operation press the ENTER MARK key Note Co ordinate polarity may be switched by rolling the scrollwheel or pressing the 2 key To use a navigation device connected to radars via a LAN set 3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT to ON then select LAN at 1 NAV AID Push the right button to close the menu Note When the AIS function is active DEAD RECKONING is shown in gray to indicate that it is not available for selection 1 73 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 38 Second trace Echoes In certain situations echoes from very distance targets may appear as false echoes second trace echoes on the screen This occurs when the return echo is received one transmission cycle later or after a next radar pulse has been transmi
114. 220 VAC 30 60 Hz 380 VAC 30 50 Hz 440 VAC 30 60 Hz RSB 100 101 102 45 rpm 220 VAC 30 50 60 Hz HSC 440 39 60 Hz HSC FAR 2827W RSB 103 24 rpm powered by processor unit FAR 2837S Same as FAR 2137S BB FAR 2837SW RSB 104 105 21 26 rpm 200 VAC 30 50 Hz 220 VAC 30 60 Hz 380 VAC 30 50 Hz 440 VAC 30 60 Hz Radiator FAR 2117 BB FAR 2127 BB XN12AF 4 ft XN20AF 6 5 ft XN24AF 8 ft FAR 2827 FAR 2137S BB SN30AF 10 ft SN36AF 12 ft FAR 2827W XN20AF 6 5 ft XN24AF 8 ft FAR 2837S SN30AF 10 ft SN36AF 12 ft FAR 2837SW SN30AF 10 ft SN36AF 12 ft xvii SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Blackbox type FAR 2137S BB ANTENNA UNIT FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB ANTENNA UNIT Performance Monitor PM 51 built in Performance Monitor PM 31 built in FAR 2137S BB FAR 2117 BB FAR 2127 BB POWER SUPPLY UNIT PSU 007 For FAR 2137S BB Standard ce EE Option Dockyard supply Category of Units Antenna unit Exposed to weather All other units Protected from weather PROCESSOR UNIT RPU 013 CONTROL UNIT RCU 014 Keyboard or RCU 015 Trackball Control Unit i RCU 016 Remote External Monitor IEC 61162 1 Serial Data m Input Output Navigator INS GPS etc IEC 61162 1 Serial Data ees o SENSU Log u Gyrocompass
115. 24 3 IEC 61162 2 Ed 1 0 1998 ITU R M 1177 3 title and or number and date of issue of the standard s or other normative document s For assessment see e EC Type Examination Module B Certificate No BSH 4612 4341742 10 issued by Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency BSH The Federal Republic of Germany EC Quality System Module D Certificate No BSH 4613 02206 1602 10 issued by Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency BSH The Federal Republic of Germany This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96 98 EC on marine equipment modified by Commission Directive 2009 26 EC and 2010 68 EC On behalf of Furuno Electric Co Ltd Nishinomiya City Japan Man April 8 2011 Qu lity Assurance Department Place and date of issue name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person
116. 3 9335 PWR 03P9348 03P9244 03P9346 MSS 7497 200 220V 39 MSS 7497A 380 440V 3 SCANNER CHASSIS RSB 098 21 26 rpm RSB 099 21 26 rpm RSB 100 45 rpm RSB 101 45 rpm RSB 102 45 rpm RF MODULE RTR 080 MIC ASSEMBLY RU 9760A MOTOR RM 7398 RSB 098 099 21 26 rpm 200 220V 3 RM 7435 RSB 098 099 21 26 rpm 380 440V 3 RM 9519F RSB 100 101 102 45 rpm 220V 3 50 Hz RM 9520F RSB 100 101 102 45 rpm 220V 3 60 Hz RM 9521F RSB 100 101 102 45 rpm 440V 39 60 Hz DIODE LIMITER RU 9426 CIRCULATOR RC 65848 PULSE TRANSFORMER RT 9273 MAGNETRON MG5223F APPENDIX Power Supply Unit PSU 007 for FAR 2137S BB 2837S FURUNO Mois a ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 2010 1 M SYMBOL NAME REMARKS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TB1 RELAY HG3 DC12V Antenna unit RSB 104 105 for FAR 2837SW FURUNO ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 201394 SSS SYMBOL NAME REMARKS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TB 03P9349 BP GEN 03P9347 MSS MSS 7497 200 220V 3 MSS 7497 A 380 440V 93 RM 7398 RSB 104 21 rpm 200 V 3 50 Hz RSB 104 26 rpm 220 V 3 60 Hz RM 7435 RSB 105 21 rpm 380 V 36 50 Hz RSB 105 26 rpm 440 V 3 60 Hz AP 35 APPENDIX Transceiver unit RTR 082 for FAR 2837SW FURUNO Unit Transceiver Unit RTR 082 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST SYMBOL NAME REMARKS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TB 03P9349 IF 03 9335 PW
117. 40 45 more 50 m LOW LEVEL ECHO 0 CONDITION menu Not available on IMO or A type AP 7 APPENDIX 2 Digital Interface Input sentences RP Board J4 ABK ACK BWC BWR DBS DBT DPT DTM GGA GLL GNS HDT MTW MWV RMB RMC RTE THS VBW VDR VHW VTG VWR VWT WPL ZDA AIVDM AIVDO AIALR Output sentences ABM ALR BBM OSD RSD TLB TLL TTD TTM VSD Not available on IMO radar Data reception Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in IEC 61162 2 The following parameters are used Baud rate 38 400 bps HDT AIVDM AIVDO and AIALR All other sentences 4800 bps Data bits 8 07 0 Parity none Stop bits 1 Start Stop bit Data bits bit Validity and integrity of input data mode indicator Data Latitude and Longitude COGISOG indication GREEN color GNS A D normal data GGA 1 2 3 4 5 BWC A D GLL A D and status A VBW A BWR A D RMC A D and status VHW VTG A D RMB A D and status RED color GNS E M S N invalid data 0 6 7 8 GLL E M S N or status V RMC E M S N or status V VBW V VTG E M S N BWC E M S N BWR E M S N RMB E M S N or status V T pm or doubtful can occur when the 85 sentence gives RAIM error rate of 10 m or higher and Age of differential GPS data in GGA and GNS sentences is 10 seconds or higher In this case the ship s latitude and longitude indicat
118. 440 100 VAC Data and marks not SPU board Replace SPU board displayed in Transmit status Adjust GAIN with A C SEA 1 IF amplifier 1 Replace IF amplifier set at minimum Marks and indications appear but no noise or echo 2 Signal cable between 2 Check continuity and isolation of antenna and processor coaxial cable unit Note Disconnect the plug and lugs at both ends of coaxial cable before checking it by ohmmeter 3 Video amplifier board 3 Check video coax line for secure connection If connection is good replace SPU board Continued on next page 6 7 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING Advanced troubleshooting con t Problem Probable causes or check Remedy points Marks indications and noise appear but no echo Transmission leak 1 TX high voltage protection circuit has activated 1 Reset power to restore normal operation representing own ship position is absent 2 Magnetron 3 Modulator board 4 SPU board Picture not updated or picture freeze up 2 SPU board 3 Video freeze up Incorrect orientation of 1 SPU board picture 2 Gyro interface 2 Check magnetron current Replace magnetron 3 Replace modulator board 3 Turn off and on the radar 1 The message HDG SIG MISSING appears when the heading pulse is not received during transmitting 2 Replace the gyro interface Cannot operate radar from SPU Board Replace SPU Board on screen boxes Radar is proper
119. 5 4 15 1 4 22 Messages You may transmit and receive messages via the AIS to a specified destination MMSI or all ships the area Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation for example an iceberg sighted Routine messages are also permitted Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety information They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS Creating saving messages This section shows you how to create and save a message Nine messages may be saved Note You can display the TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu and set ship s MMSI no by right clicking the appropriate AIS target in the AIS target data display 1 Right click the AIS DISP box 2 Select 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE TRANSMIT MESSAGE BACK 2 ADDRESS TYPE ADDRESSED BROADCAST 3 MESSAGE TYPE SAFETY BINARY MMSI 000000000 CHANNEL AIB A or B A and B OPEN FILE 1 SAVEFILE 1 EDIT TRANSMIT MESSAGE TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu Select 2 ADDRESS TYPE 4 Select ADDRESSED message for specific MMSI or BROADCAST message to all AIS equipped vessels in area Select 3 MESSAGE TYPE Select SAFETY for safety message or BINARY for routine message 7 For ADDRESSED message do this step For BROADCAST message go to step 9 1 Select 4 MMSI NO 2 Use the scrollwheel to enter ship s MMSI no Select alphanumeric character then push the scrollwheel 8 Select 5 CHANNEL 9 Select the AIS channel to transmit your message over A
120. 5 0 5 0 75 1 3 6 12 24 1 5 2 3 4 6 48 96 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 120 Range unit nm only nm only nm sm km nm sm km nm sm km kyd kyd kyd Sub display No No Yes Yes Yes VRM unit No No Yes Yes No Track Other No Yes Yes Yes Yes ship xiii FOREWORD Specification type and function availability con t Function B W Trail Eraser No No Yes Yes No Trails Color No No Yes Yes Yes Trails Hide No No Yes Yes Yes Trails Long No No Yes Yes Yes 12H 24H Trails Narrow No No Yes Yes Yes WPT marker No Yes Yes Yes Yes Signal Processing Functions This radar has the signal processing functions described in the table below All signal processing functions are set with the Picture feature See section 1 35 for additional information Signal processing function Description 7 Interference rejector Suppress interference transmitted by other radars Interference received simultaneously from many radars can be difficult to reduce Echo stretch Enlarge target echoes especially small echoes Suppress interference sea clutter and rain clutter before using echo stretch to prevent the enlargement of unwanted echoes Echo averaging The radar samples echoes with each scan Targets that show a large change with each scan are judged as clutter and are reduced to display only echoes from legitimate targets Requires pos
121. 5 3 4 24 Viewing messages When AIS message is received the display shows an appropriate icon to alert you If you are set up to automatically display AIS messages they are automatically displayed upon receipt The system stores up to 20 AIS messages When the storage capacity is reached the oldest AIS message is automatically erased to make room for the latest Note that received messages and alarm messages are not backed up when the power is turned off Manually viewing received messages To view received AIS messages do the following 1 Right click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display AIS TARGET MENU 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS NO YES 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS NO YES 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES OFF ON 4 RECEIVED MESSAGES 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE 6 VOYAGE DATA 7 STATIC DATA 8 AIS ALM MESSAGES AIS TARGET menu 2 Select 4 RECEIVED MESSAGES Up to five received messages are displayed RECEIVED MESSAGES 1 1 1 BACK L 2 O9DEC2003 12 34 ADDRESSED SAFETY MMSI 107374182 RECEIVED MESSAGES menu 4 AIS OPERATION 3 Select the message which you want to see NAME FURUNO CALL 112233 STORM WARNING VICINITY OF 35 N 135 W Example of received AIS message max 180 characters 4 Push the right button several times to close the message and the menu Displaying messages You can display AIS messages upon receipt as follows Right click the AIS DISP box Select 3 AUTO DI
122. 5 30 0 0 min lt Rate of turn CSE course when water tracking mode is selected at radar STW speed thru water when water tracking mode is selected at radar AIS data display 4 9 4 AIS OPERATION 4 7 2 Detailed target data 1 Use the trackball to put the cursor on the desired AIS target in the data box at the right side of the screen 2 Push the left button to show detailed data Ship s name Call sign Latitude Longitude Position fixing device Position accuracy HIGH LOW Navigation status MMSI No IMO No Length Width Draft Destination Estimated Time of Arrival AIS program no Assocation ON OFF Type of ship and cargo EXPANDED DATA NAME VOYAGER CALL WRE45T LAT 34 44 2345 N LON 135 32 1890 E POS SENSOR GPS POS ACC HIGH NAV STATUS UNDERWAY USING ENGINE MMSI No 107374182 IMO No 123544876 SHIP LENGTH 55m SHIP WIDTH 15m SHIP DRAFT 2 8m DESTINATION KOBE ETA 01 FEB 12 59 AIS VERSION 0 ASSOCIATION OFF SHIP amp CARGO TYPE CARGO SHIPS ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE Expanded data 4 7 3 Removing a target data display Put the cursor on the data you want to remove and hit the TARGET DATA key 4 7 4 Canceling tracking on a target from target data display Put the cursor on the target you want to stop tracking and hit the TARGET CANCEL key 4 10 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 4 AIS OPERATION AIS Symbol Attributes You may adjust the brill
123. 5 m then push the scrollwheel Select 6 CREW Roll the scrollwheel to set number of crew 0 8191 then push the scrollwheel Push the right button to close the menu 4 AIS OPERATION 4 7 Target Data You may display an AIS target s data by selecting it on the display when the AIS function is set for AIS DISP FILT 4 7 1 Basic target data By keyboard 1 Use the trackball to put the cursor on the AIS target symbol you want to know its data 2 Press the TARGET DATA key By trackball 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display TARGET DATA amp ACQ CURSOR MENU 2 Use the trackball to put the cursor on an AIS target symbol The selected target is marked with a broken square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected A Location of target s data box Not shown on W type radar Activated target selected for data display Location of target data MMSI No AIS MMSI 665498114 Name of ship VOYAGER Bearing to target 208 6 T 34 37 912 N Q Position Range to target RNG 12 3NM Nav status Target s course TCOG 9 0 T UNDER WAY Target s speed 1500 8 2kn USING ENGINE Target s CPA CPA 5 32NM Target s gt TCPA 33 31 Target s bow cross range BCR 5 65NM HDG 048 0 T Heading Target s bow cross time BCT 2
124. 8 AlS Symbol Attribute Sininen Preterea 4 11 458 1 AlS symbol brillante iioi ete uuu ee eaaa 4 11 45 2 AIS symbol size and color Ee qi ires 4 11 4 9 Past Position Display eto ria ne eR Ue RE ERR HELD ORI ie e REI 4 12 4 9 1 Past position 4 12 4 9 2 Past position 9 4 13 4 9 3 Past position display motion 4 13 4 9 4 Stabilization in true Motion 4 13 4 10 Lost Target co IDA I dee Eom NE 4 14 4 101 Lostttargetfillefiu EE 4 14 4 10 2 Enabling disabling the lost target 4 15 AV RO TT SOU yk ahay acne ted tay akapa ct oie des E cea 4 16 4 12 AIS Collision Alarm CPA TCPA 4 17 4 12 1 Setting the CPA and 2 222 1 2 1 eene tenen enhn 4 17 4 12 2 Enabling disabling the AIS collision alarm 4 17 4 12 3 Limiting the function of the collision 4 18 4 13 Association of TT and AIS Targets u suet esses 4 19 4 14 Own Ship s Data tacet ener ern cosustedvisvideaveravecevacecttvc
125. 97 RF MODULE RTR 078A FAR 2117 BB 2817 RTR 079A FAR 2127 BB 2827 MIC ASSEMBLY RU 9601 FAR 2117 BB 2817 RU 9603 FAR 2127 BB 2827 D8G 516 24 rpm w capacitor D8G 571 42 rpm w capacitor DIODE LIMITER RU 9099 FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2817 2827 CIRCULATOR FX00 0220 00 FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2817 2827 PULSE TRANSFORMER RT 9023 FAR 2117 BB 2817 RT 9025 FAR 2127 BB 2827 MAGNETRON MAF1565N FAR 2117 BB 2817 MG5436 FAR 2127 BB 2827 AP 32 APPENDIX Antenna unit RSB 103 104 105 for FAR 2827W FURUNO Model FAR 2827W a Unit RSB 104 105 REMARKS ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 2011 04 SYMBOL NAME PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TB 03P9349 BP 03P9347 MOTOR D8G 516 Transceiver unit RTR 081A for FAR 2827W FURUNO Model FAR 2827W Transceiver Unit RTR 081A REMARKS ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 2011 04 SYMBOL NAME PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TB 03P9349 IF AMP 03 9335 PWR 03P9348 MD 03P9244 RFC 03P9346 MIC ASSEMBLY RU 9601 MOTOR 109P0824H602 DIODE LIMITER RU 9099 CIRCULATOR FX00 0220 00 PULSE TRANSFORMER RT 9023 ISOLATOR FX0157 MAGNETRON MG5436 AP 33 APPENDIX Antenna unit RSB 098 099 100 101 102 for FAR 2137S BB 2837S FURUNO zmay swssa Unit SYMBOL NAME REMARKS ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TB 03P9349 IF 0
126. A lll Ill a yyyyy Yyy a X X X X XXXXXX X X a a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 13 10 jl toot til J t8 oft toot ll sasa 7 Jl T Lla 6 Lo tie la 5 dE do t 4 tM 3 LS 2 1 1 UTC of position fix 2 Status A data valid V navigation receiver warning 3 Latitude N S 4 Longitude E W 5 Speed over ground knots 6 Course over ground degrees true 7 Date dd mm yy 8 Magnetic variation degrees E W 9 Mode indicator see note 10 Checksum NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator A Autonomous D Differential E Estimated dead reckoning M Manual input S Simulator N Data not valid The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field The Status field shall be set to V invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A Autonomous and D Differential The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not be null fields Data is used in case of A data valid and A and D Data is not used in case of V data invalid E M S and N AP 16 APPENDIX RTE Route 1 Total number of messages being transmitted 2 Message number 3 Message mode c complete route all waypoints w working route first listed waypoint is FROM second is TO and remaining reset of route 4 Route identifier 5 Waypoint identifier 6 Waypoint n identifier 7 Checksum THS True
127. AB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH 9 EBL VRM CURSOR SET BARGE MARK depending on installation preset 0 RING 2 IMO and A types show OFF ON 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE MARK menu 4 Use the trackball to select a menu item and push the left button 5 Roll the scrollwheel to select an option and push the left button to validate your selection 6 Push the right button consecutively to close the menu Several pushes may be necessary depending on the menu used Note Hereafter all menu procedures are described using the trackball module trackball scrollwheel buttons For sake of brevity we write Select menu item or menu option where you roll the scrollwheel and push the left button or scrollwheel to complete a task on the menu 1 5 1 RADAR OPERATION Operation by the On Screen Boxes All radar functions can be accessed by using the trackball alone This is done by choosing the appropriate on screen box with the trackball and operating the trackball module to select item and option See section 1 9 for location of all on screen boxes On screen boxes come in two varieties Function selection and function selection w pop up menu On screen boxes of the latter type have gt at the right side of their boxes as the MARK box shown below To operate the radar using on screen boxes do the following 1 Use the trackball to place the trackball marker inside the box desired Note The trackball marker
128. ALARM ACK key or click the ALARM ACK box with the left button Z Thicker than activated target 4 5 4 AIS OPERATION 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 How to Sleep Targets Sleeping an individual target You may sleep an AIS target as below when the screen becomes filled with targets which might prevent important radar and AIS displays from being identified Note that targets that have been activated automatically cannot be slept 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display TARGET CANCEL EXIT in the guidance box 2 Use the trackball to put the cursor on an activated AIS target symbol 3 Push the left button The activated target symbol is replaced with the sleeping target symbol Sleeping target Sleeping all targets 1 Right click the AIS DISP box to open the AIS TARGET menu AIS TARGET MENU 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS NO YES 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS NO YES 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES OFF ON 4 RECEIVED MESSAGES 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE 6 VOYAGE DATA 7 STATIC DATA 8 AIS ALM MESSAGES AIS TARGET menu 2 Select 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS 3 Select YES to sleep all AIS targets 4 Push the right button to close the menu 4 6 4 AIS OPERATION Setting Up for a Voyage There are five items on the VOYAGE DATA menu you will need to enter at the start of a voyage navigational status ETA destination draught and crew 1 Right click the AIS DISP box at the right side of t
129. Alarm setting Your ship s position where you start the anchor watch Alarm triggered Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 MARK Select 5 ANCHOR WATCH Select ON Roll the scrollwheel to set the alarm range from 0 9 99 nm Push the right button to close the menu P Or Fo 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 53 Drop Mark The operator inscribes a drop mark 7 at a selected location to find the range and bearing from own ship to the mark This can be useful for marking a point to avoid while navigating to a destination 1 53 1 Activating the drop mark feature 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 2 MARK MARK BACK 2 OWN SHIP MARK OFF MIN SCALED STERN MARK OFF ON PI LINE ANCHOR WATCH OFF ON 0 0NM DROP MARK OFF ON INS MARk EBL OFFSET BASE STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH EBL VRM CURSOR SET 1 BARGE MARK depending on installation preset RING MO and A types show OFF ON 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE 3 Select 6 DROP MARK 4 Select ON Two DROP MARK boxes appear at the bottom of the display See the figure on the next page 5 Push the right button several times to close the menu 1 103 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 53 2 a drop mark 1 2 1 53 3 1 104 Left click one of the DROP MARK boxes at the bottom of the screen Put the cursor on the point you want to measure the range and bearing and push the left button drop mark is ins
130. BARGE SIZE LENGTH and WIDTH 4 ARRANGEMENT 1 ECHO 1 BACK L 2 2ND ECHO REJ OFF 1 BACK 3 TUNE INITIALIZE 2 PICTURE 1 OFF ON 4 PM OFF ON PICTURE 2 OFF ON 5 SART OFF ON PICTURE 3 OFF ON 6 WIPER OFF 1 2 PICTURE 4 OFF ON 7 ECHO AREA CIRCLE WIDE ALL NEAR OFF ON 8 PICTURE SELECT FAR OFF ON L 9 STC RANGE 10 to 10 00 NEAR BUOY OFF ON L 2 MARK 1BACK FAR BUOY OFF ON L 2 OWN SHIP MARK OFF MIN SCALED ROUGH SEA OFF ON 3 STERN MARK OFF ON SHIF OFF ON L 4 PI LINE 1 BACK HARBOR OFF ON 2 PI LINE BEARING REL TRUE COAST OFF ON 3 PI LINE 1 2 3 6 4 PI LINE MODE PARALLEL PERPENDIC L 5 RESET PI LINE NO YES L 5 ANCHOR WATCH OFF ON 0 00NM 6 DROP MARK OFF ON L7 INS MARK 1 BACK 2 USER CHART OFF ON CURVED EBL OFF 4 CHART SYMBOL OFF ON 5 NOTE BOOK OFF ON DISPLAY 6 ROUTE OFF CENT ALL L 7 PREDICTOR OFF ON L 8 EBL OFFSET BASE STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH L 9 EBL VRM CURSOR 1 BACK 2 EBL1 REL TRUE 3 EBL2 REL TRUE 4 VRM1 NM SM km kyd 2 cURSOR OEE ON 5 2 NM SM kyd FRONT HALF LENGTH 6 CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE 4 REAR HALF LENGTH 7 CURSOR RANGE NM SM kyd 5 NET WIDTH 0 RING OFF ON 8 CURSOR 6 ROTATE STEP 3 ALARM
131. C Board Noise Filter DVI I F Board INVERTER Board LCD Board LCD Unit PCB PWR Pack DC DC Board Noise Filter FIL Board INVERTER Board LCD Board LCD Unit DVI I F Board AP 30 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY TYPE PROCESSOR UNIT RPU 013 Model FAR 2107 BB 2807 Processor Unit RPU 013 Control Unit RCU 104 Control Unit RCU 015 Monitor Unit MU 201CR Monitor Unit MU 231CR 2010 11 03P9339 03P9338 03P9337 HV9017 03P9342 03P9332 AC spec DC spec CONTROL UNIT RCU 014 03P9343 03P9362 TA4726N CONTROL UNIT RCU 015 03P9344 TA4726N MONITOR UNIT MU 201CR RKW 12 13RE 03P9359 CF 205A MXB 1206 33 SCBFRNB A 201PW021 C 201PW023 H 210NL128102AC31 02 AC spec DC spec AC spec DC spec MONITOR UNIT MU 231CR BSM 501A RKW 12 13RE 03P9359 CF 205A MXB 1206 33 03P9360 NA19002 4241 NA21808 FLC59UXC8V 04 BSM 501A AC spec DC spec AC spec DC spec REMARKS Monitor unit MU 231 ELECTRICAL PARTS Monitor unit MU 190 ELECTRICAL PARTS APPENDIX AP 31 APPENDIX Antenna unit RSB 096 097 for FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2817 2827 FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2817 2827 Antenna Unit RSB 096 097 FURUNO ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST SYMBOL NAME REMARKS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 03P9349 03P9347 03P9244 A FAR 2117 BB 2817 03P9244 B FAR 2127 BB 2827 SCANNER CHASSIS RSB 096 RSB 0
132. DRAW 108 308 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M 6 TGT TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT F ON m 8 DATA ERASE 1 BACK 2 OWN TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL TARGET TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL 4 MARK ALL ERASE NO YES 5 WPT ALL ERASE NO YES 6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE NO YES 7 OWN TRACK DELETE 2POINTS AREA on IMO or A type radar 8 TARGET TRACK DELETE 2POINTS AREA APPENDIX Continued from previous page 6 CARD 7 NAV DATA 9 DISPLAY 1 BACK _ 2 GRID OFF L L OWN TRACK OFF ON 4 TARGET TRACK OFF ON _ 5 MARK OFF _ 6 LAND DENSITY OFF 7 PLACE NAME OFF ON 8 COAST LINE OFF ON 9 CONTOUR LINE OFF ON DEPTH 0 NEXT 1 BACK 2 NAV LINE MAP OFF ON DANGER HIGHLIGHT OFF ON 4 PROHIBITED AREA OFF ON 5 BUOY OFF ON 0 AUTO TARGET TRACK OFF ON 1 BACK 2 DRIVE SELECT READ CARD r 4 WR MARK r 5 WR NAV LINEeWPT 6 WR OWN TRACK r 7 WR TARGET TRACK 8 WR SETTING DATA 9 WR INSTALL DATA 0 NEXT 1 BACK r 2 FILE DELETE 3 CARD INITIALIZE 1 BACK 2 DEPTH OFF m ft 3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE 10 20 50 100 200 500 I 4 DEPTH MARK 000 500 I 5 CURRENT OFF I 6 WIND OFF m s kn RELATIVE
133. ENNA SELECT display right click the ANTENNA ANT SELECT Antenna no ANT1 X BAND Radar band X or S Output power gt 12 FORE Radar antenna position set at installation kW FORE MAIN TOP MAIN 2ND ANT3 X BAND MAIN 3RD 12 MAIN TOP AFT PORT STARBOARD ANT4 X BAND 12 AFT Own radar no OWN RADAR No 2 1 DISP1 ANTI Using the information displayed in this 2 DISP2 pe example the antenna system configuration Current display and MASTER would look like this antenna combinations S3DISP3 MASTER 4 DISP4 ANT4 ANT3 MASTER 9 STORE INTER SW NO YES 0 SUB MONITOR OFF ON Not available on IMO or A radar 1 90 1 45 2 1 RADAR OPERATION Presetting antenna and display combinations You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and display in the radar system As an example the procedure below shows how to select the no 1 antenna unit for the no 2 display unit 1 Right click the ANTENNA box to show the ANT SELECT display ANT SELECT X BAND FORE X BAND MAIN TOP X BAND MAIN TOP X BAND AFT OWN RADAR No 2 1 DISP1 1 MASTER 2 DISP2 ANT2 MASTER 3 DISP3 ANT3 MASTER 4 DISP4 ANT4 MASTER 9 STORE INTER SW NO YES 0 SUB MONITOR OFF ON Not available on IMO or A radar 2 Select the display unit for which to select an antenna at the next step For example select 2 DISP2 to select the no 2 display unit 3 The cursor is no
134. EST 1 BACK 2 START SELF TEST menu 5 Select 2 START to start the test In a few moments the results of the test are displayed and the buzzer sounds continuously The ROMs and RAMs of the SPU RFC KEYBOARD Control Unit REMOTE Trackball only Control Unit and CARD I F UNIT are checked for proper operation OK appears for normal operation If NG No Good appears corresponding components may be defective Consult your dealer In the middle of the display the rpm of the antenna unit and various voltages are displayed 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING lt SELF TEST gt PROGRAM No RAM DIPSW SPU 0359204 03 OK OK 0000 RFC 0359202 01 OK OK KEY 0359203 01 OK OK REMOTE1 0359203 01 OK OK REMOTE2 CARD 0359209 01 OK OK 0000 PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR 12V 11 6 3 3V 3 3 5V 4 9 12V 11 6 SCANNER MOTOR 20 7 RF UNIT MONITOR TEMPERATURE 27 3 TUNE IND 1 4 HV 527 9 R MONITOR 1 6 MAG CURRENT 1 5 HEATER 1 8 12V 11 9 12V 11 8 5V 4 8 32V 31 8 OUT 19 2 TRIGGER FREQ 2273 ANT SPEED 21 6 Program Version No Installed card units are shown Self test results keyboard test 6 The small squares and circles displayed at the bottom of screen are for testing the control and keys on the control unit As you operate controls and keys corresponding squares are highlighted indicating that your control key operations are properly recognized Numerals indicate the position of the controls
135. EVEL 1 2 3 4 WATCH ALARM OFF 6M 10M 12M 15 20M ALARM SOUND LEVEL OFF LOW MID HIGH ALARM OUT 1 ALARM OUT2 ALARM menu ALARM OUT3 ALARM OUT4 PRIMARY ALARM 3 Select appropriate ALARM OUT item 6 9 ALARM OUT1 2 Normally closed ALARM OUT ALARM 0013 4 Normally open BACK 4 Select an alarm to output The alarm selected is underlined TARGET ALARM WATCH ALARM 5 Repeat step 5 to select other alarms to TT NEW TARGET TT LOST TARGET 6 Push the right button three times to close the TT CPA LIMIT menu TT AUTO ACQ TGT FULL TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL TT SYSTEM ERROR AIS NEW TARGET AIS LOST TARGET AIS CPA LIMIT AIS TGT FULL AZIMUTH HEAD LINE TRIGGER VIDEO GYRO LOG EPFS XTE ARRIVAL WPT DEPTH ALARM ACK OUT OPERATOR FITNESS ANCHOR WATCH NO CPA TCPA FOR AIS ALARM OUT POLARITY NORMAL INVERT ALARM OUT1 menu 1 88 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 44 4 Primary alarm Violated alarms appear in the Alert Box in the order of priority shown in the table below Error sensor Azimuth Datum EPFS Gyro Headline Key Log RF and system Trigger TT System Error Video Primary See the PRIMARY ALARM menu below TT CPA LIMIT NO CPA TCPA FOR AIS are ON in default Other alarms Any alarm not listed here alarm not listed here If desired you can assign primary alarms the same priority as Error alarms 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 3 ALARM 3 Select 0 PRIMARY ALARM
136. FA 150 exchanges with other AIS fitted ships all data and information required by the SOLAS 1994 as amended However they are displayed in text form By interfacing the FA 100 or FA 150 with this radar the AIS information is graphically indicated together with the radar and TT information For the IMO specification position data must be fixed by WGS 84 geodetic datum and speed input must be ground tracking If other type of datum is input the error message DATUM appears and the AIS feature is inoperative This restriction does not apply to other types When AIS is active MANUAL and REF in the speed source selection window are shown in gray to indicate they are not available for selection You may disable or enable the AIS display from the AIS DISP box Controls for AIS Keyboard The AIS uses the keys shown below TARGET DATA Displays data on AIS target selected by the trackball TARGET CANCEL Sleeps chosen AIS target Control unit RCU 014 Trackball With the cursor inside the effective display area you can access AIS functions by rolling the scrollwheel or choosing appropriate AIS function from the CURSOR menu Roll the scrollwheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to access respective AIS function TARGET DATA amp ACQ Displays target data for AIS target selected with the trackball activates chosen AIS target TARGET CANCEL Sleeps selected AIS
137. H AIS DISP Box Sat Marker K 130 m TARGET Mor lt 15 Message Arrvl ON cine 220 140 PAST POSN AEL SM 190 0 ni 210 150 CEA ATO ACIE LT rm 26 200 490 80 170 180 EOK lt TEBL1 gt 20U J I lt VRM12J lt RESET See next page OF WIT Onan Mark zac suot Esa s gt 240 22987 4 532NM ame 5 221NM CURSOR enu CU TM EBL2Box Drop Mark RESET Guidance Box EBL1Box data ALARM ACK LOST TARGET Box TX STBY Box only Denotes mark Box CPA AUTO L HL OFF Box ORIGIN Origin mark CPA LIMIT Box MAP Map mark BRILL Box OS Ship shape VRM2 Box PAST POSN Box MARK Box VRM1 wTTG TT VECTOR Box Bearing and range to mark TRAIL MODE Box PI line number TARGET ALARM Box PI line orientation PI line interval AZ Acquisition Zone Box Markers and indications Viewing distance The optimal viewing distances for the radar display units are as follows MU 170C 920mm MU 201CR 1080 mm MU 231CR 1200 mm MU 190 1020 mm MU 231 1200 mm Note Magnetic fields do not affect the picture 1 13 1 RADAR OPERATION Electronic Position fixing DGPS System and position Heading is TRUE 242 2 T variation corrected gyro or 9 9kn BT WAN magnetic heading 0 1kn Speed data is LOG MAN etc 30 2 T showing sensor and ty
138. IDTH Oft ARRANGEMENT BERR BARGE INFORMATION menu 4 Select 2 BARGE MARK and push the left button Select ON and push the left button 5 Select 3 BARGE SIZE and push the left button Enter length three digits and width two digits of barge 6 Select 4 ARRANGEMENT and push the left button This item lets you set a single barge or a barge chain Select one of the five arrangements and push the scrollwheel Select number of barges max 9 to display As you roll the scrollwheel the squares light or extinguish and the number of barges selected appears at the right side 7 Push the right button twice to close the menu Barge Far left is 1st row INS marker You can get predicted position data by connecting this radar to an INS Open the menu and select 2 MARK Spin the scrollwheel to select 7 INS MARK and 7 PREDICTOR Select ON Push the right button three times to close the menu 5 e 1 61 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 35 Automatic Picture Setup According to Navigation Purpose Every time your navigating environment or task changes you must adjust the radar which can be a nuisance in a busy situation Instead of changing radar settings case by case it is possible to assign the function keys to provide optimum settings for often encountered situat
139. IS OPERATION 4 11 4 16 ROT Setting You may set the lower limit of the ROT Rate Of Turn at which the heading line on target symbols will point in direction of turning of the vessel 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu TT AIS SYMBOL BACK TT AIS SYMBOL COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT AIS ROT TAG LIMIT 000 0 MIN TT PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS SCALED SYMBOL OFF ON Not available on IMO type AIS SYMBOL menu Select 3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT 4 Use the numeral keys or the scrollwheel to enter ROT setting range 0 1 to 720 0 min 5 Push the right button three times to close the menu z Ship turning gt to starboard ROT display 4 12 4 12 1 4 12 2 4 AIS OPERATION AIS Collision Alarm CPA TCPA The AIS continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach CPA and predicted time to CPA TCPA of each AIS target When the predicted CPA of an AIS target becomes smaller than a preset CPA range and its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA limit the audio alarm sounds and AIS COLLISION appears in red in the Alert Box In addition the symbol of the offending AIS target is red and flashes together with its vector CPA TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size tonnage speed turning performance and other characterist
140. IS target and tracked target setting range 0 000 0 999 nm RANGE Enter the range direction difference from own ship to AIS target and tracked target setting range 0 000 0 999 nm BEARING Enter the bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and tracked target setting range 0 0 99 9 SPEED Enter the speed difference between AIS target and tracked target setting range 0 0 9 9 kn COURSE Enter the course difference between AIS target and tracked target setting range 0 0 99 9 8 Push the right button three times to close the menu When the association criteria gap range bearing speed and course is met and the ASSOCIATION TARGET setting is AIS the TT symbol is erased and only the AIS symbol is displayed Further ASSOCIATION appears in the Alert Box All default association settings are restored whenever the power is turned on 4 14 4 AIS OPERATION Own Ship s Data Own ship s static data type of ship call sign name and position of internal and external GPS antennas can be viewed as follows 1 Right click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen to open the AIS TARGET menu 2 Select 7 STATIC DATA STATIC DATA 1 BACK TYPE OF SHIP 000 ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE CALL SIGN call sign here NAME ship name here EXT GPS ANT POSN A 000m B 000m C 00m D 00m STATIC DATA menu 3 Push the right button to close the menu 4 21 4 AIS OPERATION 4 1
141. N riu cursor on target 1 then push r ja the left button me 2528 ma vave 4 Operate the No 1 VRM until the range marker on the EBL Range bearing Range bearing aligns with target 2 The active between targets VRM readout at the lower right 1and2 corner of the screen indicates the distance between the two targets 5 You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets targets 3 and 4 by using the No 2 EBL and the No 2 VRM To return the EBL origin to the screen center show EBL OFFSET EXIT in the guidance window then push the left button 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 23 Target Alarm The target alarm serves to alert the navigator to targets ships landmasses etc entering a specific area with audiovisual alarms AN CAUTION e The alarm should not be relied upon as the sole means for detecting possible collision situations e A C SEA A C RAIN and GAIN controls should be properly adjusted to be sure the alarm system does not overlook target echoes The target alarm zone has a fixed width of 0 5 nm in the radial direction depth and is adjustable from 3 0 to 6 0 nm guard zone 1 and any distance guard zone 2 On the Non IMO radar the boundaries can be set at any distance On any radar type the sector of the zone can be set from 0 to 360 degrees in any direction 1 23 1 How to set a target alarm The procedure below shows how to set a target alarm using the figure below as a
142. NE SELECT Use the scrollwheel to enter the nav line number you want to display Select numeral and push it to set Note that the same nav line no cannot be entered more than once Use FORWARD or REVERSE to select the order to display waypoints on the nav line FORWARD to display them in original order or REVERSE to display them in reverse order Select appropriate option then push the scrollwheel To skip the next waypoint Select 2 SKIP NEXT WPT Push the right button twice to close the menu Displaying external nav lines Nav lines from an external navigator can be displayed as below RTE and WPL sentences are necessary to display a nav line from a navigator Sea Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 8 NAV LINE WPT Select 2 NAV LINE DATA Select EXT DATA Do the following as appropriate 1 Set width 0 0 9 9 nm of the nav line with 5 NAV LINE WIDTH 2 Turn waypoint number display on or off with 4 DSP WPT NO page 2 of NAV LINE WPT menu 3 Set turning line with TURNING LINE page 2 of NAV LINE WPT menu Push the right button two or three times depending on which page of the NAV LINE WPT menu you are using 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Waypoint mark C and W types only The waypoint mark shows the location of a destination waypoint that is set on a navigator You may mark this location on the radar display by following the procedure shown below 350 000 010 020 040 Way
143. ON e To continue entering the same mark or line with the guidance box showing MARK EXIT use the trackball to select location then push the left button e To quit entering marks or lines push the right button when the guidance box reads MARK EXIT and W types item on DISPLAY Item on DISPLAY seven colors IMO and A types menu menu available A Mark 1 1 Red Buoy Danger Highlight Green Buoy Buoy L Red Buoy Buoy Green Buoy M Red Buoy ML Green Buoy Buoy Red Buoy X Danger Highlight Green Buoy Purple Danger Highlight L Mark Purple Danger Highlight u Mark A Orange Mark Mark LJ Orange Mark o Mark W Orange Mark Mark esse Purple Navline map coso Nav Line map se Gray Contour Line Coastline Purple Danger Highlight cove Contour v Purple cable Danger Highlight Prohibited Area Orange Mark v cable Danger Highlight eeee Orange Mark 2 wlline Buoy wiline Mark wlline Mark gt graphics the DISPLAY menu shown hidden PAGE 1 5 MARK 8 COASTLINE 9 CONTOUR LINE PAGE 2 2 NAVLINE 3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT 4 PROHIBITED AREA 5 BUOY Note Any inscribed mark or graphic is retained when the power is turned off 5 5 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 5 5 5 1 Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines A total of 20
144. OPERATOR S MANUAL MARINE RADAR FAR 2807 Series FAR 2107 BB Series Complies with IMO MSC 192 79 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD www furuno co jp FURUNO ELECTRIC CO LTD 9 52 Ashihara cho Nishinomiya 662 8580 JAPAN Telephone 81 0 798 65 2111 Fax 81 0 798 65 4200 Pub No 0ME 35190 P DAMI FAR 2107 2807 SER Elemental Chlorine Free The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free FURUNO Author ized Distributor Dealer A JAN 2004 P APR 08 2011 00017457512 IMPORTANT NOTICES General e The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury e Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO e f this manual is lost or worn contact your dealer about replacement e The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice e The example screens or illustrations shown in this manual can be different from the Screens you see on your display The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings e Save this manual for future reference e Any modification of the equipment including software by persons not authorized by FURUNO will cancel the warranty e All brand and product names are trademarks registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders How to disca
145. PENDIX AP 21 APPENDIX AIVDO UAIS VHF Data link Own vessel report 1 Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message 1 to 9 2 Message sentence number 1 to 9 3 Sequential message identifier 0 to 9 4 AIS channel Number 5 Encapsulated ITU R M 1371 radio message 6 Number of fill bits 0 to 5 7 Checksum Data are MMSI no navigation status ETA destination draught type of ship call sign ship s name and GPS antenna position Output sentences ABM UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message ABM x xX X XXXXXXXXX X XX S X hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message 1 to 9 2 Message sentence number 1 to 9 3 Message sequence identifier 0 to 3 4 The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU R M 1371 message 6 or 12 5 AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message 6 VDL message number 6 or 12 see ITU R M 1371 7 Encapsulated data 8 Number of fill bits 0 to 5 9 Checksum AP 22 ALR Set alarm state ALR hhmmss ss xxx A A c c hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Time of alarm condition change 2 Local alarm number identifier 3 Alarm condition A threshold exceeded V not exceeded 4 Alarm s acknowledge state A acknowledged V unacknowledged 5 Alarm s description text 6 Checksum UAIS Broadcast binary message BBM x x X X XX S S X hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Total number of sentences needed to tran
146. POINTS AREA Colors not shown on IMO type TARGET TRACK DELETE 2 Not available on IMO type 2POINTS AREA 3 Not available on IMO or A type DATA ERASE menu Select 5 WPT ALL ERASE 5 Select YES to erase all waypoints 6 Push the right button three times to close the menu 5 21 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 10 4 5 22 Waypoint list The waypoint list stores position data of all registered waypoints Each page of the waypoint list holds eight waypoints To display the waypoint list 1 Right click the MENU box at the right side of the screen to open the menu 2 Select 8 NAV LINE WPT to open the NAV LINE WPT menu 3 Select 7 WPT LIST Asterisks indicate no data WPT LIST 1 25 BACK L TOP 001 WP1 34 42 110 N 136 31 580 E 002 WP2 33 97 690 N 134 64 350 E 003 004 005 006 007 008 0 NEXT L LAST WPT list 4 To go to a next page select 0 NEXT 5 Push the right button several times to close the waypoint list and the menu 5 10 5 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Displaying waypoint name and number You may turn waypoint name and number display on or off as desired 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 8 NAV LINE WPT 3 Select 0 NEXT poo iE non NAV LINE WPT 2 2 BACK ARRIVAL WPT ALARM OFF ON TURNING LINE OFF ON REVISED DISP WPT NO OFF ON DISP WPT NAME OFF ON NAV LINE WPT menu 2 2 Select 4 DISP WPT NO Select OFF o
147. R 03P9348 MD 03P9244 RFC 03P9346 MIC ASSEMBLY RU 9760A MOTOR 109P0824H602 TR LIMITER TL378A CIRCULATOR 65848 or RC4910S PULSE TRANSFORMER RT 9273 MAGNETRON MG5223F AP 36 APPENDIX Parts location Monitor unit MU 231CR AC specification Noise Filter AC spec LF 205A DC spec MXB 1206 33 TT TL Ac FIL Board 03P9360 DC DC Board 03P9359 AC spec For DC spec PWR Pack DVI I F Board RKW 12 13RE is used BSM 501A LCD Unit Inverter Board FLC59YXC8V 04 NA19002 4241 1 y LCD Board NA21808 Monitor unit MU 231CR inner shield plate removed Monitor unit MU 231 AC specification 109P0612H755 2650063 Motor fan FAN2 FAN3 Wind direction upward LQ231U1LW32 OZP 120 12 15 J06 gt 26S0062 LCD 26P0023 31 ESSIP33A 1C AD board 4 26P0013 Monitor unit MU 231 AP 37 APPENDIX Monitor unit MU 201CR DC specification Noise Filter AC spec LF 205A DC spec MXB 1206 33 DIV I F Board PWR Module RKW 12 13RE SCBFNRB A DC spec For AC spec DC DC Board 03P9359 is used LCD Board 201PW023 H Inverter Board 210PW021 C LCD Unit NL128102AC31 02 Monitor unit MU 201CR inner shield plate removed Monitor unit MU 190 MFB52A 12HA 001 26S0028 Motor fan FAN1 Wind direction top left LQ0DDB0094 2650048 Motor fan Wind dire
148. RATION I xvi 1 0 UU u dete pre e serge 1 1 4 TAG OR the POWOL u te 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 Control ER 1 3 TA Maim Men Mar 1 5 1 5 Operation by the On Screen Boxes a 1 7 1 02 Curso uo cea ie NaS aus desta oi ic hatuy asta sisaqa 1 10 1 7 Monitor Brilliance tne rr bte aaaeeeaa unaa ES Saee aka 1 11 1 8 Display m 1 12 1 9 On Screen Boxes and Markers 1 13 1 107T ning the Recien 2 e tee sie el A 1 15 1 10 1 Choosing the tuning method errem nct 1 15 110 2 Initializing tuning 1 15 1219 3 Autotnatic Pig sz aureus cetur Za hu amun Sinn ai a 1 16 1 10 24 Marigal Iris ia Gott actin iere a aaa aa reo epe 1 16 1 11 Aligning Heading with 1 16 1 12 Presentauonm MOUS cu uu uuu u et NS Rete repito st a t dai deat 1 17 1 12 1 Choosing presentation na toc rne 1 17 1 12 2 Description of presentation modes 1 18 1 13 Entering Own Ship s Speed
149. RATION 350 000 010 33 030 320 AS S AF Wy 2 040 Z SS SN e a ww wg o o TIN 74 1 7 ny o 2 2 Yy 190 180 170 Collision assessment by offset EBL No 1 220 n EBL 210 gt 50 lt vRM1 3 05MM 1 21 2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized geographically fixed north stabilized true or referenced to own ship s heading relative 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 2 MARK to open the MARK menu MARK BACK OWN SHIP MARK OFF MIN SCALED STERN MARK OFF ON 4 PI LINE 5 ANCHOR WATCH OFF ON 0 0NM 6 DROP MARK OFF ON INS MARK 8 EBL OFFSET BASE STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH 9 EBL VRM CURSOR SET 0 RING OFF ON N O 1 BARGE MARK depending on installation preset 2 IMO and A types show 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE MARK menu 3 Select 8 EBL OFFSET BASE 4 Select STAB GND STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as applicable STAB GND Reference to latitude and longitude Origin position is always fixed regardless of your ship s movement STAB HDG Reference to heading The relationship between origin position and own position is kept always STAB NORTH Reference to North The or
150. RAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M TGT TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT CURSOR L L ALIGN OFF ON DATA ERASE DISPLAY AUTO TARGET TRACK OFF ON Not available on IMO type PLOTTER menu Select 7 CURSOR L L ALIGN Select ON ALIGN appears in red next to cursor position in the cursor data box To remove the correction select OFF If you are using the AIS function select ON Push the right button twice to close the menu 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 7 4 Chart land color B C and W types You may select the color for the land on charts as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu PLOTTER BACK 2 CHART COLOR GRN YEL CYA ORANGE GRAY OWN TRACK INTERVAL OFF DRAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M OWN TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAGANHT TGT TRACK INTERVAL OFF DRAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M TGT TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAGANHT CURSOR L L ALIGN OFF ON DATA ERASE DISPLAY AUTO TARGET TRACK Not available on IMO type PLOTTER menu 3 Select 2 CHART COLOR 4 Select color desired 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 5 11 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 8 5 12 Hiding Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter Display 1 2 3 Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu Select 9 DISPLAY Select an item To go to page 2 select 0 NEXT You may re
151. RVAL OFF DRAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M TGT TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT CURSOR L L ALIGN OFF ON DATA ERASE DISPLAY AUTO TARGET TRACK OFF ON Not available on IMO type PLOTTER menu 3 Select 7 CURSOR L L ALIGN 5 8 5 7 5 7 1 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 4 Select ON ALIGN appears in light blue next to cursor position in the text area if chart alignment has been done To remove the correction select OFF If you are using the AIS function select ON 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu Chart Cards A B C and W types FURUNO or NAVIONICS charts can be overlaid on the radar image when they are interfaced with the optional Card I F Unit CU 200 AN CAUTION Handle chart cards and memory cards with care eKeep cards away from direct sunlight heat sources and active gases e Keep cards away from water and chemicals e Keep the connector free foreign material e Do not drop the cards Chart cards are intended as an aid to navigation The navigator has the responsibility to check all aids available to confirm position Displaying a chart To display a chart 1 Insert a chart card in either of the two card slots in the Card I F Unit CU 200 FURUNO 1 2 Slot slot location 2 Press the POWER button on the control unit to turn the power on With the radar transmitting select the radar display N
152. SP MESSAGES Select ON Push the right button to close the menu Pe ad a When a message arrives the message arrival icon R4 appears at the right hand side of the display Click the icon with the left button to show the message Viewing alarm messages The transponder outputs various alarm messages You can view them as follows Right click the AIS DISP box Select 8 AIS ALM MESSAGES Select the date display of alarm you want to view Push the right button twice to close the menu 4 25 4 AIS OPERATION 4 16 AIS System Messages 5 system messages are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen The table below shows the AIS system messages and their meanings AlS system messages Message Meaig AlS COLLISION CPA and TCPA of an activated AIS target are below value set on the menu AIS NEW TARGET AIS target has entered an acquisition zone AlS LOST Lost target An activated target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or five reporting intervals whichever is the shorter full targets from own ship ASSOCIATION Tracked target merged with AIS target The indication disappears when the target no longer meets the criteria set in section 4 12 When the message RECEIVE is displayed ASSOCIATION is not displayed NO CPA TCPA FOR AIS_ CPA TCPA cannot be calculated Further the CPA TCPA value in the basic data display is marked with an asterisk t
153. STAB HDG STAB NORTH AZ POLYGON OFF STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH TRIAL MANEUVER TT AIS SYMBOL CPA AUTO ACTIVATE AIS DISP FILTER AIS LOST FILTER TT LOST FILTER ASSOCIATION TT AIS menu 3 Select 5 TT AIS SYMBOL TT AIS SYMBOL BACK TT AIS SYMBOL COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL Not available on CYA MAG WHT IMO type AIS ROT TAG LIMIT 0 000 MIN TT PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS SCALED SYMBOL OFF ON 3 12 3 9 3 9 1 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Displaying Target Data The TT mode provides the full functionality of TT as required by the IMO Resolution A 823 19 and IEC 62288 including display of range bearing course speed CPA and TCPA ofall tracked targets The target bearing is show in relative bearing in the head up mode and true bearing in the course up north up and true motion modes with the suffix R Relative or T True The target speed and course are shown as speed over the ground or speed through the water depending on speed source Displaying target data By keyboard Use the trackball to put the cursor on a desired tracked target and press the TARGET DATA key The target s shape changes to a square To erase target s data from the data box press the key again By trackball 1 With cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to show TARGET DATA amp ACQ CURSOR MENU in the guidance box 2 Use the trackball to put
154. Select ALL to erase all of the corresponding track 6 Push the right button three times close the menu 5 16 5 9 6 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Erasing track with the cursor You may erase own ship track or any target s track directly on the screen by two points or area Select the erasure method and then erase track x Specified point Erase track between two points Erase track within a specific range Choosing erasure method Left click the MENU box Select 5 PLOTTER and push the left button Select 8 DATA ERASE and push the left button Select 7 OWN TRACK DELETE and push the left button Select 2POINTS or AREA as appropriate and push the left button 2POINTS Erase track between two points AREA Erase all track within an area Select appropriate option for 8 TARGET TRACK DELETE similarly 7 Push the right button three times to close the menu Vice S Erasing track between two points area 1 Place the cursor inside the effective display area 2 Spin the scrollwheel to show OWN TRACK DELETE EXIT or TGT TRACK DELETE EXIT in the guidance box at the bottom right hand corner on the screen whichever track you want to erase 3 Use the trackball to place the cursor at the top left corner of the area or 1st point in case of erasure by two points and push the left button 4 Use the trackball to drag the cursor at the bottom right corner of the area or 2nd point in case of erasure by two points
155. T PULSE LENGTH A C SEA SELECT AUTO RAIN SELECT TUNE SELECT ANT HEIGHT SEA CONDITION 2ND ECHO REJ SART WIPER 3 STD KEY 1 2 ALARM ACK STBY TX HL OFF EBL OFFSET MODE OFF CENTER CU TM RESET LINE VECTOR TIME VECTOR MODE TARGET LIST TRAIL BRILL MARK MENU RANGE UP RANGE DOWN ACQ TARGET DATA TARGET CANCEL 4 TT AIS E 1 BACK 2 DISP TT DISP AIS TARGET DATA amp ACQ PAST POSN INTERVAL REF MARK CPA LIMIT CPA TCPA AZ1 AZ2 TARGET LIST SORT TRIAL MANEUVER ASSOCIATION AIS MESSAGE TRIAL MODE CHANGE AIS SCALED SYMBOL 5 OPERATION 1 BACK 2 ECHO COLOR PALETTE RING ALARM1 ALARM2 WATCH ALARM RESET ZOOM MARK DELETE OWN TRACK DELETE TGT TRACK DELETE CHART ALIGN DISPLAY SELECT MOB USER DEFAULT TLL ANCHOR WATCH COLOR SHIFT ICON DISP OWN TRK ALL ERASE TGT TRK ALL ERASE MARK ALL ERASE DROP MARk and W types APPENDIX Continued from previous page 6 PICTURE 1 BACK L 2 PICTURE1 PICTURE 2 PICTURE 3 PICTURE 4 NEAR FAR NEAR BUOY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR COAST 7 OPERATION 1 BACK 2 WHEEL DRIVE NORMAL REVERSE KEY BEEP OFF LO MID 4 REMOTE KEY F KEY DISPLAY SELECT 5 POPUP GUIDANCE OFF ON 6 OWN SHIP VECTOR OFF HDG COURSE L 7 STERN UP OFF ON L 8 SHUTTLE FERRY OFF MODE1 MODE2 0 NEXT 4 BACK 2 USER DEFAULT
156. TA TARGET CANCEL OPERATION BACK ECHO COLOR PALETTE RING ALARM 1 ALARM2 WATCH ALARM RESET ZOOM MARK DELETE OWN TRACK DELETE TGT TRACK DELETE CHART ALIGN DISPLAY SELECT RADAR COMBINE MOB USER DEFAULT TLL ANCHOR WATCH COLOR SHIFT ICON DISP OWN TRK ALL ERASE TGT TRK ALL ERASE MARK ALL ERASE DROP MARK 1 69 1 RADAR OPERATION 5 Select 2 6 Selectfunction desired then push the scrollwheel or left button 7 Push the right button twice to close the menu Description of function key programs em Description PICTURE m gt lt NOISE REL ANT SELECT PULSE LENGTH AIC SEA SELECT AUTO RAIN SELECT TUNE SELECT ANT HEIGHT SEA CONDITION 7 ECHO REJ SART WIPER ALARM ACK Cancels tracking of tracked target sleeps AIS target Si HL OFF Turns heading line on off 1 70 1 RADAR OPERATION Description of function key programs con t from previous page ltem DISP TT DISP AIS TARGET DATA amp ACQ TT Acquires target shows data for tracked target selected AIS Activates sleeping AIS target shows data for AIS target selected PAST POSN INTERVAL REF MARK CPA LIMIT TCPA TARGET LIST SORT TRIAL MANEUVER ASSOCATION AIS MESSAGE TRIAL MODE CHANGE AIS SCALED SYMBOL Deletes own ship s tracks according to setting of OWN TRACK menu see page 5 15 Deletes other ship s tracks according to s
157. TARGET TRACK 2 RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL MARK ALL ERASE NO YES WPT ALL ERASE NO YES NAV LINE ALL ERASE NO YES OWN TRACK DELETE 2POINTS AREA Colors not shown on IMO type TARGET TRACK DELETE 2 Not available on IMO type 2POINTS AREA 3 Not available on IMO or A type DATA ERASE menu 4 Select 4 MARK ALL ERASE 5 Select YES to erase all marks 6 Push the right button three times to close the menu 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 6 Radar Map Corrections 5 6 1 Radar map correction When there is positional error between the radar screen and radar map marks and lines do the following to correct it 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display CHART ALIGN L OFF EXIT in the guidance box 2 Operate the trackball to align the radar map with the radar screen 3 Push the left button to set MAN ALIGNED appears at the right side of the screen To release the radar map correction display CHART ALIGN L OFF EXIT in the guidance box then push the left button until MAN ALIGNED disappears from the screen 5 6 2 Cursor data correction You can correct cursor data as below 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu PLOTTER BACK 2 CHART COLOR GRN YEL CYA ORANGE GRAY OWN TRACK INTERVAL OFF DRAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M OWN TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT TGT TRACK INTE
158. Target list 3 To scroll the list when there are more than three targets select 0 NEXT Note To refresh data select 9 REFRESH DATA then push the scrollwheel This is not necessary when the sorting method is changed see next page data is automatically updated whenever the sorting method is changed 4 Push the right button to close the list 3 15 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 10 3 10 1 3 16 Sorting the target list You may sort the target list by CPA TCPA BCR BCT RANGE or SPEED as follows 72 nm or 96 nm range scale 1 Right click the TARGET LIST box TARGET LIST MENU 1 SORT BY CPA TCPA BCR BCT RANGE SPEED TARGET LIST menu 2 Select 1 SORT BY 3 Select sorting method desired 4 Push the right button to close the menu Vector Modes Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship s heading Relative or north True Description of vectors Ground stabilization and sea stabilization Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized You can select ground or sea stabilization from the SPEED menu Select BT Bottom Tracking for ground stabilization or WT Water Tracking for sea stabilization The TT VECTOR box shows the stabilization mode as TRUE G or TRUE S Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using a compass heading and single axis log water speed inputs Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to
159. U CU TM modes only or the radar video plotter display to display the chart To display a chart after the power has been turned on change the range by pressing the RANGE or RANGE key or operating the RANGE box 5 9 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 7 2 5 7 3 5 10 Chart position correction There may be a case where the chart overlay is not aligned with the radar image This is due to an error in the position fixing system GPS Loran etc or the different coordinates between the position fixing system and the radar In this case align the chart with the radar image as below 2 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display CHART ALIGN L OFF EXIT in the guidance box Operate the trackball to align the chart with the radar map Note that track is neither recorded nor displayed at this point Push the left button to set CHART ALIGN appears in red at the right side of the screen To release the chart position correction display CHART ALIGN L OFF EXIT in the guidance box then push the left button until CHART ALIGN disappears from the screen Correcting cursor data 1 Left click the MENU open the menu Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu PLOTTER BACK 2 CHART COLOR GRN YEL CYA ORANGE GRAY OWN TRACK INTERVAL OFF DRAW 10S 30S 1M 2M 3M 6M 15M OWN TRACK COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT TGT TRACK INTERVAL OFF D
160. WPT LIST NAV LINE SET NAV LINE LIST NEXT NAV LINE WPT menu 1 2 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 7 f you want to be alerted when own ship nears a waypoint by a preset distance select 0 NEXT then push the scrollwheel NAV LINE WPT 2 2 1 BACK 2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM OFF ON 0 19NM 3 TURNING LINE OFF ON REVISED 4 DISP WPT NO OFF ON 5 DISP WPT NAME OFF ON NAV LINE WPT menu 2 2 8 Select ARRIVAL WPT ALARM 9 Select ON 10 Select 3 TURNING LINE 11 Select appropriate option OFF Turns turning lines off ON Use this setting when the vessel is not to correct cross track error to return to course set after arriving at turning line location REVISED Use this setting when vessel is to return to course set after correcting cross track error after arriving at turning line location Note Before using the turning line feature set the Trial Maneuver function as appropriate on the TT AIS menu No cross track error Cross track error correction at turning line correction at turning line Turning line I TURNING LINE ON TURNING LINE REVISED Turning line 12 Push the right button three times to close the menu 5 29 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 11 6 5 30 Displaying nav line waypoint mark Displaying internal nav lines ey Or ct 8 9 Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 8 NAV LINE WPT Select 2 NAV LINE DATA Select INTERNAL DATA Select 3 NAV LI
161. aise the range 2 Select manual tuning following the procedure in section 1 10 1 Use the trackball to place the arrow on the tuning bar area in the TUNE box 4 Rollthe scrollwheel to adjust tuning The best tuning point is where the bar graph swings maximum The arrow below the bar graph shows tuning control position not the tuning condition Aligning Heading with Gyrocompass With connection of a gyrocompass ship s heading is displayed at the right side of the screen Turn on the radar and match the on screen GYRO readout with the gyrocompass reading as shown below Once you have set the initial heading correctly resetting is not usually required This alignment is not necessary for the FURUNO SC 60 120 Satellite Compass 1 Right click the HDG box at the top right corner of the screen HDG MENU 1 HDG SOURCE AD 10 SERIAL 2 GC 10 SETTING 000 0 HDG menu 2 Roll the scrollwheel downward to select GC 10 SETTING Note If the heading source selected is not suitable change it at 1 HDG SOURCE to match your heading source 3 Roll the scrollwheel to set the heading For entry through the keyboard use the numeric keys 4 Push the scrollwheel to finish 5 Push the right button to close the menu 1 12 1 12 1 1 RADAR OPERATION Presentation Modes This radar has the following presentation modes Relative Motion RM Head up Unstabilized Head up TB Head up with compass stabilized bearing sca
162. also be adjusted from the PICTURE box 1 28 Noise Rejector White noise may show itself on the screen as random speckles spread over the entire radar image You can remove this noise as follows 1 PICTURE MENU INT REJECT OFF 1 2 3 ECHO STRETCH 1 2 3 1 2 3 NOISE AUTO STC OFF ON AUTO RAIN 1 2 3 4 VIDEO CONTRAST 1 2 9 4 AIBIC PULSE CONDITION DEFAULT NO SAVE USER FACTORY 2 Select 4 NOISE REJ 3 Select ON or OFF as appropriate 4 Push the right button to close the menu 1 RADAR OPERATION Right click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to open the PICTURE menu 1 45 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 29 1 46 Wiper The wiper feature automatically reduces the brilliance of weak signals noise sea clutter rain clutter etc and unwanted signals such as radar interference to clear the picture of unwanted echoes Its effect depends on the wiper setting used and whether each averaging is turned on or off as described below Echo averaging and wiper states and wiper effect Wiper setting 1 Wiper setting 2 Echo averaging OFF Condition A Condition A Echo averaging ON 1 2 3 ConditionA Condition B Condition A The brilliance of unwanted weak echoes such as noise sea clutter and rain clutter is reduced to clear up the picture The difference between wiper setting 1 and 2 is that brilliance
163. ar navigating situation Those involved are interference rejector echo stretch echo average noise rejector automatic anti sea and anti rain clutters video contrast and pulselength and sea and radar conditions Adjusting these features from the PICTURE menu changes the original function key settings To restore the original settings for a particular picture setup option it is necessary to select the default setting For this reason we recommended that you use the user programmable function sets when frequent adjustment of the radar picture is necessary 1 62 1 RADAR OPERATION Picture setup options and default settings for X band 12 kW 25 kW and S band 30 kW radars RAIN REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST fore Jo or vp 2 ore 2 e or Fore ore ore 28 2 B B PICTURE 1 2 PICTURE 2 2 PICTURE 3 2 PICTURE 4 2 2 2 T 2 _ 2 2 _ 2 _ NEAR FAR NEAR BUOY FAR BUOY ROUGHSEA 2 SHIP 2 _ 2 _ or or OF for HARBOR orr fo or COAST 8 PULSE 9 CONDITION P L on P L on P L on P Lon 3 P Lon 6 nm P Lon Sea Cond Low Level Echo 0 5 nm 0 75 nm 1 5 nm n 12 24 nm PICTURE 2 PICTURE 3 PICTURE 4 S 1 M 1 M m 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 NEAR 1 S 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 71 7 m mi T m O Oj O V o 2 o mimim mimm
164. argets manually AUTO50 50 targets automatically 50 targets manually AUTO75 75 targets automatically 25 targets manually AUTO100 100 targets automatically A target just acquired automatically is marked with a broken square and a vector appears within one minute to indicate the target s motion trend Within three minutes the initial tracking stage is finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking At this point the broken square mark changes to a solid circle Targets automatically acquired are distinguished from those acquired manually The targets which are acquired manually are displayed with a thicker line Enabling auto acquisition 1 Right click the arrow in the TT ACQ MODE box to show the TT TARGET menu TT TARGET MENU TT SELECT MANUAL100 AUTO 25 AUTO 50 AUTO 75 AUTO 100 ALL CANCEL NO YES REF TARGET VECTOR OFF ON TT TARGET menu 2 Select 1 TT SELECT 3 Select automatic acquisition condition desired referring to the table above for details 4 Push the right button to close the menu Note 1 The TT ACQ MODE box shows AUTO when the automatic acquisition condition is selected Note 2 When the menu set number of automatically acquired targets is reached the message TARGET FULL AUTO is displayed at the right hand side of screen 3 5 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 5 2 3 6 Terminating tracking of targets including reference targets When the TT has acquired the menu set n
165. arm buzzer sounds if no log signal is present for 30 s e With the serial speed inputs and SOG selection if the type of data is changed from SOG to STW the label LOG in red appears and the alarm buzzer sounds 1 22 1 13 2 1 14 1 RADAR OPERATION e On the IMO type with AIS in use LOG WT MANUAL and REF are shown in gray to indicate they are not available for selection e Asingle axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the leeway direction e f speed over the ground cannot be obtained a deep area select LOG WT turn on SET DRIFT and enter set and drift values See section 3 12 for the procedure Manual speed input If the speed log is not working enter speed manually as below In this case the speed data type is shown as MANUAL and is speed thru water STW Manual speed input is not available on the IMO radar when the AIS feature is active 1 Right click the SPD box at the top right corner of the screen to display the SPEED menu Select 1 SHIP SPEED Select MANUAL then push the left button Select 2 MANUAL SPEED Roll the scrollwheel to set speed For entry through the keyboard use the numeric keys Push the left button to confirm setting 7T Push the right button to close the menu m D Choosing a Range Scale The selected range scale range ring interval and pulselength are shown at the upper left corner on the screen When a target of interest comes closer re
166. arning label TT COLLISION and the flashing of the triangle plotting symbol and vector remain in the Alert Box until the dangerous situation is gone or you intentionally terminate tracking of the target Note that when the TT COLLISION alarm is generated the AIS display is automatically turned on Acquisition Zone The acquisition zone functions both to alert you targets in a specific area and acts as an automatic acquisition area when automatic target acquisition is active Any targets entering the zone will be automatically acquired When a target enters an acquisition zone the buzzer sounds and the indication TT NEW TARGET or AIS NEW TARGET appears in red in the Alert Box The symbol of the offending target is red and flashing Further the AIS display is automatically turned on if it is off Activating an acquisition zone One or two acquisition zones may be activated The No 1 acquisition zone is available between 3 and 6 nm and the No 2 acquisition zone can be set anywhere when the No 1 zone is already in use The TT AIS acquisition zone s lines are white and dashed so as to distinguish them from the radar target alarm The procedure below shows how to set an acquisition zone using the example at the bottom of the page 1 Use the trackball to select one of the AZ Acquisition Zone boxes at the right side of the screen BET Acquisition zone status 2 2 Blank Cancel acquisition zone SET Set acquisition zone WORK
167. as illustrated in the right hand figure at the top of then next page the target ship is on a collision course 5 To return the EBL origin to the own ship s position press the EBL OFFSET key twice By trackball 1 Display an EBL following steps 1 3 in By trackball in section 1 20 1 2 With the cursor inside the effective display area push the left button roll the scrollwheel to show EBL OFFSET EXIT in the guidance box then push the left button 3 Use the trackball to place the offset EBL on a target appearing as threatening in the illustrated example on the next page then push the left button to anchor the EBL origin 4 After waiting for a few minutes at least 3 minutes operate the EBL used in step 1 until it bisects the target at the new position A The EBL readout shows the target ship s course which may be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting To return the EBL origin to the screen center show EBL OFFSET EXIT in the guidance window then push the left button 350 000 010 020 330 NS 030 NN 7 320 ny 040 310 Q 2 S F N 240 2 2 Q ny 300 Wy linn N 3 D 8 5 SD N SS SN S EBL 1 gt 198 27 lt 7 210 pu 200 1 RADAR OPE
168. ast position display motion The past position display may be shown in true or relative motion Open the TRAIL menu and set TRAIL MODE to TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate Stabilization in true motion The true motion past position display may be ground stabilized or sea stabilized The PAST POSN box shows current stabilization as TRUE G or TRUE S To change the stabilization mode open the SPEED menu and set SHIP SPEED to BT ground stabilization or WT sea stabilization 4 13 4 AIS OPERATION 4 10 4 10 1 4 14 Lost Target A target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or five reporting intervals whichever is the shorter When this occurs the target is marked with the flashing lost target symbol and the indication LOST appears in the Alert Box To acknowledge a lost target press the ALARM ACK key or use the trackball to select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button Lost target Note 1 If a TT lost target mark is displayed when the ALARM ACK key is pressed or the ALARM ACK box is clicked to acknowledge an AIS lost target the TT lost target also is erased Note 2 The AIS data transmission interval depends on target s speed For example the data is transmitted every 10 seconds on ship speed of 0 to 14 knots and every two seconds on the ship speed of more than 23 knots For details see the owner s manual of the AIS Lost target filter If there are a lot of AIS targets i
169. ay on ocean current relative to North or off 6 WIND Selects unit of wind speed measurement wind speed format Wind vector format can be selected from three choices RELATIVE Apparent wind measured by wind meter with ship s bow as reference TRUE THEORETICAL Apparent wind minus ship s movement with ship s bow as reference TRUE NORTH Apparent wind minus ship s movement with North as reference 7 TEMP Turns water temperature indication on off 8 DATE TIME Selects how to display date and time OFF UTC or LOCAL 9 LOCAL TIME ADJ If LOCAL is selected at 8 DATE TIME roll the scrollwheel to set the time difference between local time and UTC time A negative value may be selected by spinning the scrollwheel past zero 0 WPT DATA Turn waypoint data off or select waypoint data reference true or relative 4 Push the right button twice to close the menu Note Wind and current data require appropriate sensors Depth data requires appropriate echo sounding equipment Wind vector shows a direction from which the wind blows in relative to own ship heading and labeled T Wind velocity is a true wind speed as a result of compensating for own ship s speed and orientation Ocean current tide is shown relative to bow in head up cursor gyro and course up and reference to North in north up and true motion N OS heading 0 Current relative to north Present depth full scale 10 kn Wind direct
170. box shows SUB and the image from the sub monitor is shown on this radar 5 Push the right button to close the menu Antenna related functions of the sub monitor for example pulselength cannot be controlled from this radar 1 105 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 55 1 55 1 1 106 Net Cursor The net cursor is used to depict your fishing net on the radar display It is especially useful for bottom trawlers for knowing where the net is located Enter the dimensions of your net in the menu to show the net in scale on the display EBL2 Net cursor 2 Activating the net cursor 1 Left click the MENU box 2 Select 2 MARK then push the left button 3 Select 9 EBL CURSOR SET then push the left button EBL VRM CURSOR SET 1 BACK 2 EBL1 REL TRUE 3 EBL2 REL TRUE 4 VRM1 NM SM km kyd 5 VRM2 NM SM km kyd 6 CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE 7 CURSOR RANGE NM SM km kyd 8 CCURSOR SHAPE 9 CURSOR BRG SCALE 3607 32 POINTS 4 Select 8 CURSOR SHAPE then push the left button 1 55 2 1 RADAR OPERATION SHAPE BACK O CURSOR OFF ON FRONT HALF LENGTH 0 0m REAR HALF LENGTH 0 0m NET WIDTH 0 0m ROTATE STEP 3609 32 POINTS WARP LENGTH 0 0m Select 2 CURSOR then push the left button Select ON then push the left button to enable the net cursor EBL2 is then automatically turned on Push the right button four times to close the menu Setting net cursor dimensions ad
171. cal Low A B lt 0 2V Log navigator Baud rate is adaptive with RX data Complies with IEC 61162 1 Photo Coupler 470 ohm HN RD A PC 400 y RD B V This port is an opticoupler used to isolate I F terminal on RD terminal Absolute maximum rating Input Forward current 50 mA Reverse voltage 6 V Output Supply voltage 16 V High level output voltage 16 V Low level output current 50 mA AP 28 APPENDIX Serial interface output ports TT for ECDIS Baud rate for output sentences are set on the Initial Settings menu Complies with IEC 61162 1 Dual differrential drivers and receivers TD A SN751178NS TD B Logical High A B gt 0 2V Logical Low A B lt 0 2V Serial interface input output ports Baud rate is fixed at 38 4 kbps Complies with IEC 61162 2 AIS Input port RD A Isolated RS485 Transceiver RD A LTC1535 RD B V Logical High A B gt 0 2V Logical Low A B lt 0 2V AIS Output port TD A B Isolated RS485 Transceiver TD A LTC1535 TD B GND VV Logical High A B gt 4 0V Logical Low A B gt 4 0V AP 29 APPENDIX 3 Parts Lists and Parts Location Parts lists Processor unit RPU 013 Control unit RCU 104 105 Monitor unit MU 201CR 231CR FURUNO ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST SYMBOL PTU Board SPU Board HV Board Terminal Board NET Board PNL Board BUZ Board Trackball Assy PNL Board Trackball Assy PWR Pack DC D
172. call for repair terminal strip and plug connections inside Also check the rubber gasket of antenna covers for deterioration Check for loose connections Check contacts and plugs for proper seating etc Do not use chemical based cleaners to clean the LCD They can damage the LCD coating Do not use chemical based cleaners to clean the processor unit They can remove paint and markings Sealing compound may be used instead of paint Apply a small amount of grease between nuts and bolts for easy removal in future Do not use chemical based cleaners for cleaning They can remove paint and markings If you need to remove ice from the antenna unit use a wooden hammer or plastic head hammer Crack on the unit may cause water ingress causing serious damages to internal circuits When closing antenna covers in position be careful not to catch loose wires between covers and unit 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts Type Life expectancy Antenna Motor D8G 516 24 rpm X band Gear motor D8G 571 42 rpm X band RM 7398 21 26 rpm S band RM 7435 21 26 rpm S band RM 9519F 45 rpm S band RM 9520F 45 rpm S band RM 9521F 45 rpm S band Carbon brush MG120 5X6X11 D8G X band Check for wear when replacing magnetron Replace if worn MAF1565N X band 12 kW Check no of hours MG5436 X band 25 kW used at Tx time Reset MG5223F S band 30 kW time after replacement
173. ch they appear in the Alert Box An unacknowledged alarm can be acknowledged from the list by selecting its number and hitting the left button To erase the data for the number selected hit the left button again To erase all alarm indications select 9 REFRESH DATA and long push the left button To display the alarm list put the cursor in the Alert Box and push the right button ALARM LIST 1 1 BACK L TOP SENSOR ERROR Alarm category EPFS Alarm name O3 APR 2008 09 34 Date and time of violation AIS ALARM AIS NEW TARGET AIS ALARM OS APR 2008 08 02 DUAL RADAR ALARM SENSOR ERROR OTHER ALARM LOG PRIMARY ALARM OS APR 2008 07 18 SENSOR ERROR PRIMARY ALARM SYSTEM ERROR TT COLLISION TT ALARM OS APR 2008 06 50 TT ALARM TT LOST 03 APR 2008 06 43 OTHER ALARM DEPTH 02 APR 2008 23 53 OTHER ALARM WATCH 02 APR 2008 20 00 REFRESH DATA L CLR NEXT e When there is more than one alarm page you can switch between them with 0 NEXT and 0 BACK last page e ZDA sentence required in order to display time in Alarm list 1 87 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 443 Outputting alarm signals Four ports are provided from which to output alarm signals to external equipment Select the port and alarm signals to output as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu ALARM 2 Select 3 ALARM SACK GUARD ALARM MODE IN OUT GUARD ALARM L
174. changes its configuration according to its location It is an arrow when placed outside the effective display and a cursor when inside the effective display See the illustration on the next page for further details For example select the MARK box which is at the bottom left corner Mark type last selected mark number the MARK menu MARK MARK Box i Oi MARK Q gt 162 5 T 11 7 NM o A lt MARK SELECT Bearing and range from own ship to mark MARK box When a box is correctly selected its color changes from green to orange and the guidance box at the bottom right corner shows operational guidance The operational guidance shows the function of the left and right buttons with a diagonal line separating the information For the MARK box for example the operational guidance is MARK SELECT MARK MENU In this case you would push the left button to select a mark or push the right button to open MENU r Function of left button Function of right button Guidance box t Arrow For choosing on screen box Guidance box Example guidance for MARK box 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 8 Trackball marker location and guidance box indication The trackball marker is either a cursor or an arrow X depending on whether it is within or outside the display area respectively Further the indication in the guidance box changes accor
175. ciucectucectusnaets cs 4 21 4 T5 WMIGSSAGSS vs tatio cesse doccia Siem 4 22 4 15 1 Creating saving messages cient iter 4 22 415 2 Transmitting messages 6 durar quee ps El dt ale eL ids 4 23 4 15 3 Viewing messages ier i teen tun dida 4 24 4 16 AlS System M sSag69S re er e e gh de tee i En aber e a tee 4 26 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION u 5 1 S TL L 5 1 5 2 Display MOSS erect det 5 1 5 3 _ 5 2 5 4 Radar Map u iat err 5 3 5 4 1 Showing hiding the radar map 5 3 5 4 2 Inscribing radar map marks and 5 4 5 5 Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines tret 5 6 5 5 1 Erasing individual radar map marks and 5 6 5 5 2 Erasing all radar map marks and 5 7 5 6 Radar Map 5 8 5 6 1 Radar map enne 5 8 562 Cursor dala COLEGUON 5 2 5 oe creauit ben ins 5 8 5 7 Chart Cards A B and W types iue tle e tecta cle 5 9 5 7 1 Disp
176. cribed on the screen and range and bearing between own ship and the drop mark are shown below corresponding DROP MARK box 340 p Sia 020 330 MS 030 N 7 320 040 ss 290 8 280 260 250 2 240 230 Drop 220 my 210 180 200 180 170 150 No 1 DROP gt 4 No 2 DROP 229 8 T 4 532NM 90 38 T 2 873NM MARK box MARK box Range and bearing to drop mark Erasing a drop mark Left click the appropriate DROP MARK box until the drop mark and its data are erased The DROP MARK box remains on the screen until the drop mark feature is turned off from the menu 1 54 1 RADAR OPERATION Sub Monitor A B C and W types The picture from a radar outside the LAN network can be shown on this radar processor unit display unit control unit 1 Put the cursor the ANTENNA box at the upper left side of the screen 2 Right click to show the ANT SELECT menu ANT SELECT ANT1 X BAND FORE X BAND MAIN TOP X BAND MAIN TOP X BAND AFT OWN RADAR No 2 1DISP1 ANT1 MASTER 2DISP2 2 MASTER 3DISP3 MASTER 4DISP4 4 MASTER 9 STORE INTER SW NO YES 0 SUB MONITOR OFF ON Not available on IMO or A radar 3 Spin the scrollwheel to select 0 SUB MONITOR then push the left button 4 Spin the scrollwheel to select ON then push the left button The antenna
177. ct rejection level 3 provides the highest degree of reduction Note The interference rejector can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box Echo Stretch The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to make them easier to see and it is available on any range There are three types of echo stretch 1 2 and 3 and the higher the number the greater the amount of stretch Note The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns clutter from sea surface rain and radar interference For this reason make sure these types of interference have been sufficiently reduced before activating the echo stretch To set echo stretch left click the ES indication at the left side of the display Note Echo stretch can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box 1 43 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 27 1 44 Echo Averaging The echo averaging feature effectively reduces sea clutter Echoes received from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position every rotation of the antenna On the other hand unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter echoes are averaged over successive picture frames If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames it is presented in its normal intensity Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans and its brilliance reduced making it easier to discriminate real targets
178. ction upward 7 LQ190E1LX51 26S0027 LCD 26 0013 Monitor unit MU 190 AP 38 APPENDIX Control unit RCU 014 Trackball BUZ Board 5 a 03P9362 TA4726N PNL Board 03P9343 Control unit RCU 014 rear cover removed Control unit RCU 015 Trackball Assy TA4726N PNL Board 03P9344 Control unit RCU 015 rear cover removed AP 39 APPENDIX Transceiver unit RTR 078A 079A for FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2817 2827 Circulator FX00 0200 00 RFC Board 03P9346 RF PWR Board 03P9348 Diode Limiter RU 9099 MIC Assy RU 9601 FAR 2118 2817 RU 9603 FAR 2127 2127 5A 2827 IF Board 03P9355 Transceiver unit RTR 078A 079A upper half MD Board 03P9244 A Pulse Transformer RT 9205 Magnetron MAF1565N Transceiver unit RTR 078A lower half AP 40 APPENDIX MD Board 03P9244 B Pulse Transformer RT 9203 Magnetron MG5436 Transceiver unit RTR 079A lower half Antenna unit RSB 103 for FAR 2827W BP Board 03P9347 RF Board 03P9349 Motor DG8 516 Antenna unit RSB 103 AP 41 APPENDIX Transceiver unit RTR 081A for FAR 2827W Diode Limiter RU 9099 MIC Assy RU 9601 RFC Board 03P9346 Circulator FX00 0220 00 Beneath PSl Isolator FX0157 L IF Amplifier 03P9335 PWR Board 03P9348 TB Board 03P9349 Underneath MD Board 03P9244 Pulse Converter RT 9023 Magnetro
179. d contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement To avoid electrical shock do not Name remove cover No user serviceable parts inside Type ANTENNA UNIT A CAUTION The plotting accuracy and response of this TT meets IMO standards Tracking accuracy is affected by the following e Tracking accuracy is affected by course change One to two minutes is required to restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications e The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the target Delay is on the order of 15 30 seconds for high relative speed 30 60 seconds for low relative speed e Display accuracy is affected by the following Echo intensity Radar transmission pulsewidth Radar bearing error Gyrocompass error Course change own ship and target The data generated by TT AIS and video plotter are intended for reference only Refer to official nautical charts for detailed and up to date information 7X WARNING DISPLAY UNIT PROCESSOR UNIT Warning Label 1 86 003 1011 1 Code No 100 236 231 Name Radiation Warning Label Type 03 142 3201 0 Code No 100 266 890 TABLE OF CONTENTS FOREWORD ua u xi PROGRAM NUMBER ivevescacesiesisensnacetestnsepaassisasstsmptntnsnsssaakshaevntesannnsabsaenvadeonettecetaes XV SYSTEM CONFIGU
180. d once the terminal count is reached For example if the trail time is six minutes the timer is erased when trails have been plotted six minutes The maximum time for continuous plotting is 99 59 Trail gradation The afterglow can be selected in a single tone or gradual shading eo lt Monotone Gradual shading Single Multi Trail gradation Right click the TRAIL MODE box to display the TRAIL menu Select 2 TRAIL GRAD Select SINGLE single or MULTI multiple as appropriate Push the right button to close the menu ah SS 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 30 4 Saving copying target trails By turning on the functions TRAIL RESTART and TRAIL COPY you may continue painting target trails whenever the range scale is changed The amount of range change determines how the radar paints trails See the table below for details Note however that if the previous range is restored within 10 seconds and the amount of range change is within 1 3 trails continue as before If trails become difficult to view you may delete them For details see section 1 30 10 Amount of range change How trails are processed Large ex 12 Trails continue on targets that were within the previous range scale Trails are not initiated for targets that were not within the previous range Within 1 3 of previous range Trails continue on targets that were in the ex 3 nm 1 5 nm previous range scale Within 1 4 of previous ran
181. d speed echo referenced speed for ground stabilization 3 10 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Other TT symbols Trial maneuver T Bottom center Appears during execution of a trial maneuver flashing Performance 5 Bottom center Appears during performance test test flashing 3 8 2 Choosing TT symbol C and W types In addition to the standard circle TT symbol you may select from the symbols shown below using the full keyboard This cannot be done with trackball type control unit RCU 015 RCU 016 However you can program a function key to do so with the combination of the STD KEY category and the option TARGET DATA 9 OO A AIXILIO e Put the cursor on the TT symbol you want to change Press the TARGET DATA key 3 Press the TARGET DATA key until desired symbol is displayed 3 8 3 TT symbol brilliance 1 Right click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen 2 Select 0 NEXT BRILL1 MENU 2 2 BACK BRG CURSOR EBL VRM PI LINE TT SYMBOL AIS SYMBOL L L GRID MARK CHART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 BRILL menu page 2 3 Select 6 TT SYMBOL 4 Roll the scrollwheel to adjust brilliance 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 3 11 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 8 4 symbol color You may select the color for the TT symbol as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu TT AIS BACK AZ STAB
182. ding to trackball marker location Guidance box reads JUMP CURSOR DISP MENU Push the left button to choose the on screen box closest to the arrow or push the right button to display the MAIN menu To choose boxes successively push the wheel k EB when the guidance box reads as above Then the nearest box is selected and marked Trackball marker is out of with the double ended arrow 2 and the effective display area guidance box reads incl text area and JUMP FORWARD JUMP BACKWARD not selecting a box Hit the left button to go to the box below or The trackball marker is adjacent to the currently selected box or hit an arrow the right button to go to the box above or adjacent to the currently selected box Continue pushing a button to choose boxes successively This is convenient for operation under heavy pitching and rolling To cancel this feature push the wheel when the guidance box reads as above Guidance box reads TARGET DATA amp ACQ CURSOR MENU In this condition you may access cursor operated functions by hitting the left button for direct selection of function or the right button to choose desired functions from the CURSOR menu For further details about the CURSOR menu See section 1 6 Trackball marker is within effective display area The trackball marker is a cursor 2 Push the left button or roll the scrollwheel depending on the box until the desired option is displayed in the box Note
183. ding to expected usage such as harbor navigation long range short range etc For further details see section 1 35 PICTURE MENU INT REJECT 1 2 3 STRETCH 1 2 3 1 2 3 NOISE OFF ON AUTO STC OFF ON AUTO RAIN OFF 1 2 3 4 VIDEO CONTRAST 1 2 314 PULSE CONDITION DEFAULT NO SAVE USER FACTORY PICTURE menu 2 Select 8 PULSE PULSE MENU 1 BACK 2 0 5NM 1 S2 3 0 75NM 1 S2 M1 4 1 5NM 1 S2 M1 5 3NM S2 M1 M2 M3 6 6NM M1 M2 M3 L 7 12 24NM M2 M3 L PULSE menu 3 Select a range then push the left button 4 Select pulselength desired then push the left button 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 1 15 2 Changing pulselength 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 Use the trackball to select the PULSELENGTH box at the left side of the screen The guidance box shows PULSE SHORTER PULSE LONGER PULSE XX XX Pulse width setting PULSELENGTH box 2 Push the left button to shorten the pulselength or the right button to lengthen the pulselength You may also select the pulselength by rolling the scrollwheel and pushing it or the left button 1 25 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 16 1 26 Adjusting the Sensitivity The gain control adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen If you set up for too little sensitivity wea
184. duce the range scale so that it appears in 50 90 of the display radius By keyboard Use the RANGE key to select range desired Hit the part of the key to raise the range the part to lower the range By trackball 1 Use the trackball to select the RANGE box at the top left corner of the screen The guidance box shows RANGE DOWN RANGE UP 0 125 70 025 RANGE box 2 Push the left button to lower the range the right button to raise the range You may also select the range by rolling the scrollwheel then pushing it or the left button 1 23 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 15 Choosing a Pulselength The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left position of the screen using the indications shown in the table below 1 15 1 1 24 Label and pulselength X band 10 25 kW S band 30 kW Indication Pulselength us S1 Short pulse 1 0 07 S2 Short pulse 2 0 15 M1 Medium pulse 1 0 3 M2 Medium pulse 2 0 5 M3 Medium pulse 3 0 7 L Long pulse 1 2 Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength settings you may change them as shown below Choosing a pulselength You can select the pulselength for the 0 5 to 24 nm range scales as below 1 Right click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to show the PICTURE menu Note The PICTURE box sets up the radar picture accor
185. dy state tracking condition Note 1 For successful acquisition the target to be acquired should be within 0 1 to 24 nm or 32 nm depending on initial setting from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter Note 2 When the capacity for manual acquisition is reached the message TARGET FULL MAN is displayed at the screen bottom Cancel tracking of non threatening targets if you wish to acquire additional targets manually Note 3 Target number is normally not shown On the A B C and W type radars it appears when the cursor is placed on a TT symbol A CAUTION Target Swap When a target being tracked nears another target being tracked the targets may be swapped When two targets acquired either automatically or manually come close to each other one of the two may become a Lost Target Should this happen manual re acquisition of the Lost Target may be required after the two have separated 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Lost Target Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become lost targets A lost target is shown in the display with flashing red X Flashing stops after lost target alarm is acknowledged If you are in an area where tracked targets are lost frequently you may want to disable the lost target alarm against tracked targets by maximum range or minimum speed Setting the lost target filter You set the lost target alarm to sound against lost T Ts that are wit
186. e of the following e To change the waypoint name Select 3 WPT NAME Use the scrollwheel to edit waypoint name e To edit the waypoint position Select 4 WPT L L Use the scrollwheel to edit waypoint position e To erase the waypoint Select 5 CLEAR DATA Note that a waypoint cannot be erased if it is part of a nav line Push the right button three times to close the menu 5 10 3 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Erasing waypoints Waypoints may be erased individually or collectively Note that a waypoint cannot be erased if it is part of a nav line Erasing individual waypoints 0 pu With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display MARK DELETE EXIT in the guidance box Use the trackball to put the cursor on the waypoint you wish to erase A flashing appears on the mark when it is correctly selected Push the left button or the scrollwheel to erase the waypoint To erase another waypoint repeat steps 2 and 3 To finish push the right button when the guidance reads MARK DELETE EXIT Erasing all waypoints 1 2 3 4 Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu Select 8 DATA ERASE DATA ERASE BACK OWN TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL TARGET TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL MARK ALL ERASE NO YES WPT ALL ERASE NO YES NAV LINE ALL ERASE NO YES OWN TRACK DELETE 2
187. e after acquisition vector still unreliable Steady tracking Solid circle with vector indicating steady state tracking within three minutes after acquisition CPA alarm Plotting symbol red flashes to indicate the target is predicted to come into CPA or flashing TCPA acknowledge CPA TCPA alarm is acknowledged Lost target A red X is crossed through the TT symbol to indicate that it is a lost target Flashing flashing stops after lost target alarm is acknow ledged Manually Initial stage Plotting symbol selected for a target acquired targets RE manually is shown in bold broken the width of the lines E one minute after tracking TT is thicker than that Manual lt symbol in a bold solid of the auto circle within three minutes after acquisition CPA alarm Plotting symbol red flashes to indicate collision course the target is predicted to come into CPA or AE ere acknowledged Lost target A red X is superimposed on the TT symbol to indicate a lost target Flashing stops pene after lost target alarm is acknowledged On target passing Symbol is red and flashing c lt operator set acquisition zone Target selected On selected target Target data range bearing course for data readout speed CPA TCPA BCR BCT etc Reference target On reference target Used to calculate own ship s over the groun
188. e geographically fixed ground stabilized or sea stabilized To display the origin marks heading signal and own ship position data are required Entering origin marks 1 Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the screen The guidance box now reads MARK SELECT MARK MENU MARK gt Mark type last selected mark number gt MARK box 2 Push the right button to open the MARK menu MARK MENU 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA 2 MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE 8 MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 000 00 N 000 000 00 E 9 MAP DISPLAY OFF ON 0 MAP MARK COLOR Not available on IMO RED GRN BLU YEL or A type CYA MAG WHT MARK menu 3 Select 2 MARK KIND 4 Select ORIGIN MARK No or ORIGIN MARK SYM as appropriate Select ORIGIN MARK No to inscribe standard origin mark lt gt plus mark number ORIGIN MARK SYM to inscribe desired origin mark symbol no number 5 Push the left button 6 Push the right button to close the menu The guidance box now reads MARK SELECT MARK MENU 1 55 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 56 7 With the cursor choosing the MARK box Select mark number desired ORIGIN MARK No selected at step 4 or origin mark symbol ORIGIN MARK SYM selected at step 4 then push the left button The following origin marks are available
189. e of the effective display area the bearing scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail center of display Radar antenna Conning position is at position is at center of display ANT position CCRP position Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to reference position as in the table below Markers measurements and reference point Category Reference point CCRP Antenna position VRM Range and bearing EBL Range and Range and bearing measurement VRM bearing measured from measured from antenna position ursor CCRP Graphics Heading line Drawn from Drawn from Own ship vector Own ship track 1 99 1 RADAR OPERATION Markers measurements and reference point con t Category Reference point CCRP Antenna position Bearing cursor Drawn with Drawn with CCRP at center antenna position at center Course speed Calculated with Calculated with CCRP at center antenna position at center CPA TCPA Calculated with Calculated with CCRP at center antenna position at center Calculated from bow position Own ship data Data from sensor regardless of reference point selected Note When the antenna is located some distance from the CCRP the CCRP may be outside the bearing cursor in true motion or offcenter Also when the CCRP is set as reference point some parts of the bearing cursor are not displayed 1 100 1 51 1 RADAR OPERATION
190. e set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set Cannot control Cannot control Cannot control Cannot control Cannot control Cannot control Cannot control Cannot control Cannot control Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled e If the message CHECK INT SW appears do one of the following as a pplicable If only your antenna is not displayed on the ANTENNA SELECT display LAN line in your processor may be faulty In this case use the standalone mode If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the ANTENNA SELECT display LAN line in other processor unit may be faulty In this case see page 1 91 for how to select a different antenna unit e When the Network fails the Interswitch does not work but standalone 0 peration is possible e With the dual radar display active antenna and display can be selected from the initial settings screen 1 92 1 45 3 1 46 1 RADAR OPERATION Selecting an antenna For the ship that carries multiple antennas you may choose the antenna to use as follows 1 Rollthe trackball to place the arrow in the ANTENNA box a
191. e water RNG Range from own ship to target COG Course of target over ground True or Relative SOG Speed of target over ground CPA Closest Point of Approach of target to own ship TCPA Time to CPA BCR Bow crossing range of target BCT Bow crossing time of target Tracked target display You may display the target data for two targets in one data box and the data for as many as six targets can be displayed For further details see section 1 42 Removing a target data display Full keyboard Put the cursor on the data you want to remove then hit the TARGET DATA key Cursor menu TARGET DATA amp ACQ Canceling tracking on a target from target data display Full keyboard Put the cursor on the data you want to remove then hit the TARGET CANCEL key Cursor menu TARGET CANCEL 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 9 2 Target list The target list provides a comprehensive data display of all TT and AIS targets being tracked Displaying the target list To display the target list do the following 1 Select the TARGET LIST box at the right side of the screen TARGET LIST gt TARGET LIST box 2 Push the left button to display the TARGET LIST gt in the TCPA means that the time is greater than 99 59 TARGET LIST 1 1 SORT BY CPA BACK 2 TT TARGET No 01 BRG 16 5 T RNG 2 05 NM CPA 0 17NM TCPA gt 99 59M 3 TT TARGET No 02 BRG 19 0 T RNG 2 49 NM CPA 0 29NM TCPA gt 99 59M 9 REFRESH DATA
192. ect TX STBY box at the bottom left corner then push the left button Select any target with the cursor and check that the selected target shows the course and speed as in the table CPA and TCPA shown in the table are with ship s speed of 0 kn Range CPA and TCPA change with time bearing and speed are fixed Range Bearing Speed Course CPA TCPA nm C kn C nm min TargetA 3 0 45 0 20 0 0 2 1 6 4 Target B 2 0 120 0 5 0 120 0 0 0 24 0 Target C 7 0 270 0 100 120 0 3 5 3 5 3 31 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 18 3 32 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates radar echoes on the basis of their size Target whose echo measurements are greater than those of the largest ship in range or tangential extent are usually land and are displayed only as normal radar video All smaller ship sized echoes that are less than this dimension are further analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small circles superimposed over the video echo When a target is first displayed it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a course vector as more information is collected In accordance with the International Marine Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid IMO TT requirements an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20 scans of antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scan
193. ection 1 17 1 2 Use the trackball to place the arrow on the A C SEA level indicator at the top of the display 3 While observing the A C SEA level indicator roll the scrollwheel downward to increase the A C SEA or upward to decrease it 100 levels 0 100 are available 1 18 1 18 1 1 18 2 1 RADAR OPERATION Reducing Rain Clutter Use the AUTO RAIN RAIN to reduced rain clutter AUTO RAIN reduces rain clutter in the picture and A C RAIN reduces clutter picked up by the antenna Note 1 When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced the sensitivity is decreased more than when only one is adjusted For that reason adjust them carefully Note 2 The echo average see 1 27 is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface However high speed targets are harder to detect than stationary ones when the echo average is active Automatic reduction of rain clutter Left click the AUTO RAIN indication at the left side of the screen to select AUTO RAIN setting desired The higher the number the greater the degree of rain clutter reduction OFF turns off the AUTO RAIN feature Note AUTO RAIN can also be controlled from the PICTURE box Manual reduction of rain clutter The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the ship is rolling However by this design the unit will also detect rain clutter rain snow or hail in the same manner as normal targets Unwan
194. eed and or course How much the delay is set the situation starts immediately and is updated every 0 5 seconds In the example shown below own ship will advance straight ahead even after a maneuver for a delay time of 2 30 then alters speed and course until operator specified intended speed and course are achieved position OS5 in this example OS6 and OS7 show changes in course and speed and OS8 show that the ship has completed course and speed adjustments 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Static trial maneuver The static trial maneuver shows the relationship between your ship and tracked targets at the completetion of the trial maneuver Enter expected course and speed and delay time until start of a maneuver and the expected position of your ship and tracked targets at the end of the trial maneuver are shown on the display By shortening and extending the trial time you can find the safe time to make a maneuver Thus the static trial maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the maneuver result immediately Position of target B at end of trial maneuver Course and speed changes completed position where course and speed are changed Position of target at end of trial maneuver Delay time Current position of your ship 3 16 2 Performing a trial maneuver To perform a trial maneuver do the following 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu TT AIS
195. enu short cut assigned 1 4 1 RADAR OPERATION Main Menu You may access the MAIN menu from the full keyboard or by using the trackball In later sections only the procedure for menu operation by trackball is given Main menu operation by keyboard 1 Press the MENU key The MAIN menu appears in the text area at the right side of the screen MAIN MENU ECHO Echo processing functions MARK Mainly turns markers on off ALARM Sets guard alarm functions outputs alarm signal TT AIS Sets TT and AIS functions PLOTTER Chart and track functions CARD Memory card functions NAV DATA Turns nav data on off NAV LINE WPT Processes nav lines and waypoints CUSTOMIZE TEST Customizes operation executes diagnostics 2 Press the numeral key corresponding the menu wish open For example press the 2 key to open the MARK menu MARK ak BACK 2 OWN SHIP MARK OFF MIN SCALED 3 STERN MARK OFF ON 4 PI LINE 5 ANCHOR WATCH OFF ON 0 0NM 6 DROP MARK OFF ON 7 INS MARK 8 EBL OFFSET BASE STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH 9 EBL VRM CURSOR SET 1 BARGE MARK depending on installation preset 0 RING MO and A types show OFF ON 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE MARK menu 3 Press the numeral key applicable to the item you wish to set Useful keys in menu operation 4 Consecutively press the same
196. et Setting range 000 0 SET box 359 9 T 7 Select the DRIFT box DRIFT 7 2kn 8 Use the scrollwheel to set value rolling it to select DRIFT box numeral and pushing it to set Setting range 00 0 19 9 kn Note 1 Set and drift are available when using manually input speed speed through the water The speed source is shown as WTC Water Tracking Count Note 2 Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness Note 3 Set and drift can also be adjusted with the EBL and VRM Put the cursor in either the SET or DRIFT box and operate the EBL for set and VRM for drift 3 13 3 13 1 3 TARGET TRACKING TT TT Collision Alarm CPA TCPA The TT continuously monitors the predicted ACAUTION range at the Closest Point of Approach A CAUTION CPA and predicted time to CPA CPA TCPA Alarm each TT When the predicted CPA of any The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should TT becomes smaller than a preset CPA never be relied upon as the sole means for detecting the risk of collision The navigator range and its predicted T CPA less than a is not relieved of the responsibility to keep preset TCPA limit the audio alarm sounds ViSual lookout for avoiding collisions whether or not the radar or other plotting and TT COLLISION appears in red in the is in use Alert Box In addition the symbol of the offending TT is red and flashes together with its vector This feature w
197. etting of TARGET TRACK menu see page 5 15 USER DEFAULT Restores user defaults for F1 F3 For F KEY 1 Set equipment as desired 2 Long push more then 1 s function key registered as USER DEFAULT 3 To recall a setting do step 2 The radar is then set to stand by and USER DEFAULT appears at the bottom right corner For STORE 1 Set equipment as desired 2 Select STORE at 2 USER DEFAULT BACKUP from page 2 2 of the OPERATION menu Select HOLD to register settings 3 To recall setting press the function key registered as USER DEFAULT The radar is then set to stand by and USER DEFAULT appears at the bottom right corner lili N u gt 1 71 1 RADAR OPERATION tem Descption OWN TRK ALL ERASE TGT TRKALL ERASE MARK ALL ERASE DROP MARK PICTURE PICTURE1 PICTURE4 Actuates settings of user programmed setup nm or less on calm seas nm or larger other small surface objects at close range other small surface objects at long range HARBOR Optimum setting for harbor navigation COAST Optimum setting for coastal navigation 1 37 Ship s Position Select the source of ship s position data as follows 1 Right click the OSN POSN box at the top right corner of the screen to show the OS POSN menu OS POSN MENU 1 NAV AID GPS1 GPS2 DEAD RECKONING LAN 2 MANUAL L L 00 00 00 N 000 00 00 W 3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT OFF ON OS POSN menu 2 Select 1 NAV AID 3 Select GPS1 GPS
198. ge Trails are restarted ex 3 nm 0 75 nm No trail generated for target not within previous range a Previous range b New range 1 Right click the TRAIL MODE box to display the TRAIL menu 2 Select 5 TRAIL RESTART 3 Select ON or OFF as appropriate ON Trails start extending on the newly selected range OFF Trails extend only on the range where they were initiated 4 Select 6 TRAIL COPY Select ON or OFF as appropriate 6 Push the right button to close the menu 1 49 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 30 5 1 30 6 1 50 The relationship between trail restart and trail copy depends on their status as shown in the table below Trail restart Trail copy Trail status ON ON Range changed while trail is ON Trails continue on targets within previous range ON OFF Range changed while trail is ON Trails within the previous range are erased then trails are restarted OFF OFF ON e Range changed while trail is ON New trails not initiated Trails from previous range are stored in memory e Range returned to previous range Trails continues on targets stored in memory e Trails turned ON Trails stored in memory are erased See section 1 30 10 Trails stored in the memory are erased and trails are then initiated on new range Trail level The level intensity of the afterglow that extends from radar targets may be selected as below
199. ght side of the screen shows the zoomed picture Zoom i Area Zoom display Appears in box above when nav data is turned Zoom area selected off with the cursor Data Box Zoom display To quit the zoom display push the left button when the guidance box reads EXIT 1 34 1 34 1 1 34 2 1 34 3 1 RADAR OPERATION Markers Heading line The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head up mode it changes the orientation depending on the ship orientation in north up and true motion modes Temporarily erasing the heading line To temporarily extinguish the heading line to look at targets existing dead ahead of own ship press the HL OFF key on the keyboard or use the trackball to select the HL OFF box at the bottom left corner of the display then push the left button In addition to the heading line the stern marker and all graphics within the effective display are also erased To redisplay the heading line etc release the key or the left button Stern marker The stern marker which is a dot and dash line appears opposite to the heading line To display or erase this marker do the following Left click the MENU box to open the MAIN menu Select MARK to show the MARK menu Select 3 STERN MARK Select OFF or ON as appropriate Push the right button twice to close the menu
200. h the heading sensor signal enabling you to know own ship s heading at a glance This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyrocompass If the gyrocompass fails the bearing scale returns to the state of head up mode North up mode The north up mode paints target pips at their measured distances and in their true heading sensor directions from own ship north bearing maintained at the top of the screen The heading line changes its direction according to the ship s heading Requires heading signal If the compass fails the presentation mode changes to head up and the north marker disappears Also the HDG indication shows And the message HDG SIG MISSING appears in red at the lower right corner of the screen North Marker Heading Line North up mode 1 19 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 20 Stern up mode The stern up mode rotates the head up mode picture relative and true bearings and display graphics 180 This mode is useful on dual radar tugboats when backing up one radar shows head up and another shows stern up To enable the stern up mode turn on STERN UP on the 7 OPERATION menu North Marker Heading Line Stern up mode 1 RADAR OPERATION True motion mode Own ship and other moving objects move in accordance with their true courses and speed In ground stabilized TM all fixed targets such as landmasses appear as stationary echoes In the sea stabilized TM without set and drift inp
201. h the right button to close the menu Temporarily removing trails from the display You may wish to temporarily remove all trails from the display Trails are removed but are continued internally By keyboard Press the CANCEL TRAILS key to show OFF in the TRAIL MODE box By trackball Left click the TRAIL MODE box to display OFF in the box Trail stabilization in true motion True motion trails may be ground stabilized or sea stabilized The TRAIL box shows current stabilization as TRUE G or TRUE S To change stabilization mode open the SPEED menu and set SHIP SPEED to BT ground stabilization or WT sea stabilization Erasing trails All trails may be erased including those in the memory and restarted to start trails fresh By keyboard Press and hold down the CANCEL TRAILS key until trails disappear By trackball Left click the TRAIL MODE box until all trails disappear 1 51 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 30 11 Preventing sea clutter in true trails 1 31 1 31 1 1 52 You can prevent the display of sea clutter in true trails about your ship to clear the radar picture Your ship s trails can also be shown or hidden 1 Right click the TRAIL MODE box to show the TRAIL menu 2 Select 7 OS TRAIL and push the left button 3 Roll the scrollwheel to select OFF 1 or 2 as appropriate referring to the table below Option Show own ship s trail Prevent sea clutter in true trails OFF No No 1 Yes Yes 2 N
202. he alarm 1 is highest strength Select 5ALARM SOUND LEVEL Select audio alarm volume among OFF LOW MID and HIGH Note 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL also sets the level of the audio alarm for the watch alarm Push the right button twice to close the menu 1 41 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 24 1 42 Off Centering the Display Own ship position or sweep origin can be displaced to expand the view field without switching to a larger range scale The sweep origin can be off centered to the cursor position but not more than 75 of the range in use if the cursor is set beyond 75 of the range scale the sweep origin will be off centered to the point of 75 of the limit This feature is not available on the 96 nm range or in the true motion mode If the conning position is outside the effective radar display some parts of the bearing scale are not shown For details see section 1 50 To off center the radar picture do the following By keyboard 1 Use the trackball to put the cursor at a position where you wish to move the sweep origin 2 Press the OFF CENTER key Then the sweep origin is off centered to the cursor position 3 To cancel off centering press the OFF CENTER key again By trackball 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display OFF CENTER EXIT in the guidance box 2 Use the trackball to put the cursor where you want to locate the screen center Put cursor where desi
203. he reason for the alarm is removed Alert Box Configuration lines inside box not present in actual box Line 1 Name of ERROR or ALARM category Line 2 Name of error or alarm Line 3 Message Category WARNING Line 4 Name of warning Display Example 1 ERROR and WARNING SYSTEM ERROR VIDEO WARNING FORMAT CARD DATA Display Example 2 ERROR only AIS ALARM MESSAGE AIS no valid ROT info rmation Display Example 3 ERROR and WARNING AIS ALARM MESSAGE AIS no valid ROT info WARNING RD CARD DATA 1 83 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 44 1 Alarm description Alarm description Alarm name Visual alarm reason To quit alarm status visual indication SYSTEM ERROR AZIMUTH No antenna rotation signal Acknowledge indication by pressing the ALARM key or left clicking HEADLINE oiea Signal the ALARM ACK box Restore signal KEY No key signal or remove reason for to remove RF No RF communications signal indication TRIGGER No trigger signal TT SYSTEM TT system malfunction ERROR VIDEO No video signal SENSOR ERROR GYRO The indication GYRO in red Match the on screen HDG indication appears and the HDG indication with the actual compass The reads The orientation indication HEADING SET appears mode is automatically set for Press the ALARM ACK key to erase head up TT radar map AIS and the indicatio
204. he screen to open the AIS TARGET menu AIS TARGET MENU 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS NO YES 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS NO YES 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES OFF ON 4 RECEIVED MESSAGES 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE 6 VOYAGE DATA 7 STATIC DATA 8 AIS ALM MESSAGES AIS TARGET menu 2 Select 6 VOYAGE DATA VOYAGE DATA BACK NAVIGATION STATUS 03 RESTRICTED MANOEVRABILITY ETA 00 000 0000 00 00 DESTINATION 12 DRAUGHT 00 0m CREW 0002 VOYAGE DATA menu 3 Select 2 NAVIGATION STATUS 4 AIS OPERATION 4 8 4 Select appropriate navigation status number referring to the information below then push left button 00 Underway using engine default 01 At anchor 02 Not under command 03 Restricted manoeuverability 04 Constrained by her draft 05 Moored 06 Aground 07 Engaged in fishing 08 Under way sailing 09 Reserved for high speed craft HSC 10 Reserved for wing in ground WIG for example hydrofoil 11 13 Reserved for future use 14 AIS SART No use 15 Not defined Select 3 ETA then push the left button Use the scrollwheel to enter estimated date and time of arrival in order of day two digits month year four digits and time Push the scrollwheel after entering the data Select 4 DESTINATION Enter destination Select alphanumeric character push the scrollwheel to enter 9 Select 5 DRAUGHT 10 11 12 13 Roll the scrollwheel to set ship s draught setting range 0 25
205. heading and status THS xxx x a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Heading degrees true 2 Status A Autonomous E Estimated dead reckoning M Manual input S Simulator mode V Data not valid 3 Checksum AP 17 APPENDIX VBW Dual ground water speed VBW x x xX x A x x x x A x x A x x A hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Longitudinal water speed knots Transverse water speed knots Status water speed A data valid V data invalid Longitudinal ground speed knots Transverse ground speed knots Status ground speed A data valid V data invalid Stern transverse water speed knots Status stern water speed A data valid V data invalid Stern transverse ground speed knots 10 Status stern ground speed A data valid V data invalid 11 Checksum Data shown green Data shown in red VHW Water speed and heading VHW x x T x x M x x N x x K hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Heading degrees true 2 Heading degrees magnetic 3 Speed knots 4 Speed km h 5 Checksum VDR Set and drift VDR x x T x x M x x N hh lt CR gt lt LF gt l ll 1 Direction degrees true 2 Direction degrees magnetic 3 Current speed knots 4 Checksum AP 18 APPENDIX VSD UAIS Voyage static data VSD x x X X X X C C HAMMSS SS XX XX X X X X hh lt CR gt lt LF gt l 1 10 1 9 ea 8 jubes 7
206. hen used correctly helps prevent the risk of collision by alerting you to threatening targets It is important that GAIN A C SEA A C RAIN and other radar controls are properly adjusted CPA and TCPA ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size tonnage speed turning performance and other characteristics of own ship The reference point for CPA and TCPA calculation may be selected from antenna position or conning position For further details see section 1 50 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges To set the CPA and TCPA ranges do the following 1 Left click CPALIMIT box to show the CPA and TCPA boxes CPA LIMIT Box CPA Box CPA LIMIT 0 5 10MIN TCPA Box CPA LIMIT CPA and TCPA boxes 2 Select the CPA Box 3 Push the left button or scrollwheel to select CPA value Left button 0 5 1 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 nm Scrollwheel 0 1 20 nm 0 10 nm in 0 1 nm increments 10 nm increments thereafter 4 Select the TCPA box 5 Push the left button or scrollwheel to select TCPA value Left button 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 15 minutes Scrollwheel 1 60 minutes 1 minute increment 3 21 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 13 2 3 14 3 14 1 3 22 Acknowledging the TT collision alarm Press the ALARM ACK key on the keyboard or select the ALARM ACK box with the trackball then push the left button to acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer The w
207. hin a specific range or ship speed Set the criteria as below 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu 3 Select 9 TT LOST FILTER TT LOST ALM FILTER 1 BACK 2 MAX RANGE OFF ON ONM 3 MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 0 0kn 4 Setitems 2 and 3 as appropriate referring to the description below MAX RANGE Any TT lost targets beyond this range will not trigger the lost target alarm MIN SHIP SPEED Any TT lost targets slower than this setting will not trigger the lost target alarm 5 Push the right button several times to close the menu Note Reference targets are not affected by this filter Enabling disabling the lost target alarm The LOST TARGET ALARM box at the bottom right corner enables and disables the lost target alarm Select OFF ALL or FILT as appropriate OFF Disable the alarm ALL Get the alarm against all lost targets FILT Get the alarm against the targets whose n criteria meet the settings on the TT LOST LOST TARGET box ALM FILTER menu LOST TARGET ALAEM OFF 3 9 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 8 Symbols and Attributes 3 8 1 TT symbols The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 62288 ltem Symbol Remarks Automatically Initial stage Broken circle around an echo to indicate acquired targets the target under acquisition and initial stage of tracking before steady state tracking cy Within one minut
208. iance and select the size and color of the AIS symbol AIS symbol brilliance 1 Right click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen 2 Select 0 NEXT BRILL1 MENU 2 2 BACK BRG CURSOR EBL VRM PI LINE TT SYMBOL AIS SYMBOL L L GRID MARK CHART OQ Q N Not available on IMO type BRILL menu page 2 3 Select 7 AIS SYMBOL 4 Rollthe scrollwheel to adjust brilliance 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu AIS symbol size and color You may select the size and color of the AIS symbol as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS 3 Select 5 TT AIS SYMBOL TT AIS SYMBOL BACK 2 5 SYMBOL COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT AIS ROT TAG LIMIT 000 0 MIN TT PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS SCALED SYMBOL OFF ON Not available on IMO type AIS SYMBOL menu 4 Select 2 TT AIS SYMBOL COLOR 5 Select color desired 4 11 4 AIS OPERATION 6 Select 6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL 7 Select OFF or ON as applicable OFF All AIS symbols shown in same size ON All AIS symbols are scaled according to ships lengths 8 Push the right button three times to close the menu 4 9 Past Position Display The past position display shows equally time spaced dots marking past positions of activated AIS targets A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset number is reached If a target changes
209. ics of own ship The reference point for CPA TCPA calculation may be selected from antenna position or conning position For further details see section 1 50 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges To set the CPA and TCPA ranges do the following 1 Left click CPA LIMIT box to show the CPA and TCPA boxes Not necessary if the CPA and TCPA boxes are already shown CPA LIMIT Box CPA Box CPA LIMIT 0 5NM 10MIN TCPA Box CPA LIMIT CPA and TCPA boxes 2 Select the CPA Box 3 Push the left button or scrollwheel to select CPA value Left button 0 5 1 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 nm Scrollwheel 0 1 20 nm 0 10 nm in 0 1 nm increments 10 nm increments thereafter 4 Select the TCPA box 5 Push the left button or scrollwheel to select TCPA value Left button 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 15 minutes Scrollwheel 1 60 minutes 1 minute increment Enabling disabling the AIS collision alarm Use the CPA AUTO ACTIVATE box at the bottom right corner to enable or disable the AIS collision alarm OFF Disable automatic activation ALL Activation against AIS targets whose CPA or TCPA is less than set in section 4 12 1 FILT Alarm is given against AIS targets which meet the following criteria AIS target that meets the criteria set with 6 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE on the TT AIS menu CPA or TCPA of an AIS target is smaller than that set in section 4 12 1 4 17 4 AIS OPERATION 4 12 3
210. igin position changes with North position 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 1 37 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 22 1 38 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets By keyboard 1 Press the EBL OFFSET key Operate the trackball to place the origin of the No 1 EBL for example on a target of interest target 1 in the illustrated example 2 Operate the EBL rotary control until the EBL passes through another target of interest target 2 3 Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the inside edge of target 2 The active VRM readout at the lower right corner of the screen indicates the distance between the two targets 4 You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets targets 3 and 4 by using the No 2 EBL and the No 2 VRM Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix R or as a true bearing with suffix T depending on EBL relative true settings of EBL CURSOR BEARING in the MARK menu To return the EBL origin to the screen center press the EBL OFFSET key again By trackball 1 Display an EBL following the steps 1 3 in section 1 20 1 Range A Eo 2 With the cursor inside the Markera wir RZ deplay inae EBL Target 1 12 E to show EBL OFFSET EXIT the guidance box then push EBL targeta the left button e ge 3 Use the trackball to put the P
211. ing The EBL readout is affixed by R relative if it is relative to own ship s heading T true if it is referenced to the north Available on the IMO and A type radars True or relative indication is available regardless of presentation mode Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 2 MARK to open the MARK menu Select 9 EBL VRM CURSOR SET B C and W types or 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING IMO and A types For the B C and W types the menu below appears go to step 4 For the IMO and A types go to step 5 Select EBL1 or EBL2 as applicable Select REL or TRUE as applicable Push the right button twice to close the menu EBL VRM CURSOR SET BACK 2 EBL1 REL TRUE EBL2 REL TRUE VRM1 NM SM km kyd VRM2 NM SM Kkm kyd CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE CURSOR RANGE NM SM Kkm kyd 0 CURSOR 5 Note When the gyrocompass heading changes the EBL and its indication change as follows Head up relative EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged Head up true EBL indication does not change however the EBL marker moves accordingly Course up relative EBL indication does not change however the EBL marker moves accordingly Course up true North up relative EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged EBL indication does not change however the EBL marker moves accordingly North up true EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged 1 35
212. ion indication method depends on the MENU Selection of Wind Vector Last 30 minutes 80 of depth 100 m 10 min 30 20 S Echogram Wind current graph Examples of depth echogram and wind tide graph 1 78 1 42 1 RADAR OPERATION Text Window The text window displayed at the right 1 4 of the screen mainly shows nav data zoomed target and tracked target data You can set up this window as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 9 CUSTOMIZE TEST CUSTOMIZE TEST BACK DATA BOX F 1 F2 F3 F4 OPERATION TEST CUSTOMIZE TEST menu 3 Select 2 DATA BOX DATA BOX 1 BACK 3 NAV DATA OFF ON 4 ZOOM OFF 2TIMES 3TIMES 5 ZOOM DISPLAY STAB GND STAB HGD STAB NORTH TT TRACK 6 TARGET DATA 1BOX 2BOX 3BOX LARGE DATA BOX menu Select 3 NAV DATA Select OFF or ON as appropriate Select 4 ZOOM Select OFF or zoom magnification factor 2TIMES or 3 TIMES If you selected a zoom factor at step 7 go to step 9 Otherwise go to step 11 9 Select 5 ZOOM DISPLAY go CI omo 1 79 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 80 10 Select zoom display format STAB GND Ground stabilized geographically Fixed STAB HDG Heading stabilized relative STAB NORTH North stabilized true TT TRACK Zoom tracked targets 11 Select 6 TARGET DATA 12 Select quantity of tracked target data to show among 1BOX 2BOX 3BOX and LARGE Note Nav data or zoom is a
213. ions The radar s internal computer offers several picture setup options to be assigned to each function key for your specific navigating requirements For instance one of the functions is assigned the ship detecting function and labeled SHIP on the on the PICTURE box By choosing SHIP the radar will be instantly set for optimum detection of ships Four user programmable setups are also provided labeled PICTURE1 PICTURE4 so that you may have the radar automatically adjusted to those conditions that are not covered by the provided setup options Below are the preset picture setup options provided with this radar Picture setup options description NEAR Optimum setting for short range FAR Optimum setting for long range detection using a range scale of 3 detection using a range scale of 6 nm or less on calm seas nm or larger NEAR Optimum setting for detecting FAR Optimum setting for detecting BUOY navigation buoys small vessels BUOY navigation buoys small vessels and other small surface objects at and other small surface objects at close range long range HARBOR Optimum setting for short range COAST For coastal navigation using a navigation in a harbor area using range scale of 12 nm or less a range scale of 1 5 nm or less Optimum setting for rough weather Optimum setting for detecting SEA or heavy rain vessels Each picture setup option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving optimum setup for a particul
214. ions are shown in yellow AP 8 Data sentences Data used is shown in bold italics Input sentences ABK UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement ABK XXXXXXXXX X X X X X hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 MMSI of the addressed AIS unit 2 AIS channel of reception 3 Message type 4 Message sequence number 5 Type of acknowledgement 6 Checksum ACK Acknowledge alarm ACK x x x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Local alarm number identifier 2 Checksum BWC Bearing and distance to waypoint Not available on IMO radar BWC hhmmss ss 111 1 a yyyyy yy a T M N a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Bearing degrees true Waypoint longitude E W Waypoint latitude N S UTC of observation NOTE 1 Positioning system Mode indicator A Autonomous D Differential E Estimated dead reckoning M Manual input S Simulator N Data not valid The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field Waypoint ID Distance nautical miles lz Checksum Mode indicator see note 1 Bearing degrees magnetic APPENDIX AP 9 APPENDIX BWR Bearing and distance to waypoint rhumb line Not available on IMO radar BWR hhmmss ssillll lll a yyyyy yyy a x x T x x M x x N c c ashh lt CR gt lt LF gt UTC of observation Waypoint latitude N S Waypoint longitude E W Bearing degrees true
215. is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your ship as shown in the figure below If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge for example such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen Target ship Own ship NY gt True echo False Mirror image echo 1 of target ship Go Virtual image Shadow sectors Funnels stacks masts or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees a non detecting sector may be produced Within this sector targets can not be detected Radar antenna Radar mast Shadow sector Shadow sectors 2 4 2 3 2 3 1 2 RADAR OBSERVATION SART Search and Rescue Transponder SART description A Search and Rescue Transponder SART may be triggered by any X Band 3 cm radar within a range of approximately 8 nm Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band When interrogated it first sweeps rapidly 0 4 us through the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep 7 5 us through the band back to the starting frequency This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles At some point in each sweep the SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver Ifthe SART is within range the frequency ma
216. is low NG appears at the diagnostic test for the GC Board When this occurs contact your dealer for replacement Battery on GC Board Location of battery Battery type GC board CR 1 2 8 L 000 103 769 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 5 Trackball Maintenance If the cursor skips or moves abnormally clean the trackball as below 1 Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise 45 to unlock it ff N Retaining Ring J Remowve the retaining ring and ball Clean the ball with a soft lint free cloth then blow carefully into the ball cage to dislodge dust and lint Look for a build up of dirt on the metal rollers If dirty clean the rollers using a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl rubbing alcohol Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers Replace the ball and retaining ring Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted reversely 6 5 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 6 Easy Troubleshooting This section provides troubleshooting procedures that the user may follow to restore normal operation If you cannot restore normal operation do not attempt to check inside any unit Any repair work is best left to a qualified technician Easy troubleshooting procedures Key beep inaudible Key beep turned off Adjust key beep level on the OPERATION menu referring to section 1 43 Picture not updated or Video freeze Turn the power off and on again to restore normal
217. is may eliminate the detection of some targets The TT system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost on the radar picture and if they remain in a blind zone These targets will however be acquired and tracked when they pass out of the blind zone and again present normal radar echo The angular width and bearing of any shadow sector should be determined for their influence on the radar In certain cases false echoes in the shadow sector cause the TT system to acquire track and vector them Shadow sectors should be avoided Indirect echoes A target at close range is usually picked up directly but it can also be received as reflection from a large flat surface This will result in the radar presenting two or more echoes on the display each at a different range The TT can acquire and track the false echo if it is detected by five consecutive scans Reduction in radar gain can eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range detection also will be reduced Radar interference If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range spiral dotting and or false targets may appear momentarily The interference rejector can clear the display To receive radar beacon or SART signals turn on SART in the ECHO menu 3 35 3 TARGET TRACKING TT This page is intentionally left blank 3 36 4 AIS OPERATION 4 1 The FURUNO AIS Automatic Identification System model FA 100 or
218. is process is updated continually for each target on every scan of the radar Qualitative description of tracking error The FURUNO TT s accuracy complies with or exceed IMO standards Own ship maneuvers For slow turns there is no effect For very high turning rates greater than 150 minute depending on gyro there is some influence on all tracked targets that lasts for a minute or two then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy Other ship maneuvers Target ship courses lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed or 3 to 6 seconds at low near 0 relative speed It is less accurate during a turn due to lag but accuracy recovers quickly 3 33 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 19 Factors Affecting TT Functions 3 34 Sea returns If the radar anti clutter control is adjusted properly there is no serious effect because distant wave clutter not eliminated by this control is filtered out by more than one bang correlation and scan to scan matching of data Rain and snow Clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets Adjust the A C RAIN control If it is heavy rain switch to S band if provided or switch on the interference rejector on the radar If heavy clutter still exists switch to manual acquisition Accuracy can be affected Low clouds Usually no affect If necessary adjust the A C RAIN control Non synchronous emissions No effect Low gain Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result
219. ition and speed data to improve picture clarity Suppress unwanted echoes that appear after the sweep completes a scan within one second xiv PROGRAM NUMBER MAIN 035 9204 03 Merchant Minor modification XV SYSTEM CONFIGURATION See page xvii for detailed information about antenna units and radiators With FURUNO supplied monitor FAR 2117 BB 2127 BB 2817 2827 2827W FAR 2137S BB 2837S 2837SW ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT Performance Monitor PM 51 built in Performance Monitor PM 31 built in Waveguide Waveguide gt For FAR 2827W Coax cable For FAR 2837SW i TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR 082 RTR 081A For FAR 2837SW For gi MONITOR UNIT 2107 MU 201CR MU 190 1 5 MU 231CR 2 MU 231 RU 3423 CONTROL UNIT e RCU 014 115 230 VAC POWER SUPPLY UNIT Keyboard PSU 007 of 4 For FAR 2137S BB 2837S RCU 015 24 VDC OR Trackball or POWER SUPPLY UNIT PSU 011 Control Unit i 115 230 VAC For FAR 2827W 2837SW RCU 016 i Remote Russian flag only PROCESSOR UNIT Mou Sub Display Pas I Alarm VDR T External Monitor IEC 61162 1 Serial Data Input Output Navigator INS GPS etc IEC 61162 1 Serial Data Standard m EH
220. justing net cursor orientation 1 2 Left click the MENU box Select 2 MARK then push the left button a FRONT HALF Select 9 EBL VRM CURSOR LENGTH SET then push the left button Select 8 CURSOR SHAPE then push the left button Set net cursor dimensions as follows referring to the illustration b at right a Select FRONT HALF LENGTH then push the left button b Spin the scrollwheel to set front half length 0 3000 m then push the left button c Set REAR HALF LENGTH and NET WIDTH similarly d Warp length a b in the illustration at right is indicated at the bottom of the menu The net cursor is placed at the screen center with its top and bottom points bisected by EBL2 To adjust the position of the net cursor go to step 6 Otherwise go to step 9 REAR HALF LENGTH 6 Select 6 ROTATE STEP then push the left button T 8 Select 360 or 32 POINTS as appropriate then push the left button These figures determine how finely to rotate the EBL2 when adjusting the orientation of the net cursor Select 360 for fine rotation or 32 POINTS for coarse rotation Use the rotary encoder for the EBL to adjust the orientation of the net cursor 1 107 1 RADAR OPERATION 9 Push the right button four times to close the menu 10 Use the EBL offset feature to anchor the net cursor at net origin point a Push the EBL OFFSET key b Use the trackball to set net origin point c Push the EBL OFFSET key to anch
221. k echoes may be missed On the other hand excessive sensitivity yields too much background noise strong targets may be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display To adjust receiver sensitivity adjust the gain control so background noise is just visible on the screen By keyboard While monitoring the gain level indicator at the top of the screen operate the GAIN control to adjust the sensitivity By trackball 1 Use the trackball to place the arrow on the gain level indicator at the top of the screen Level bar Place arrow inside window to adjust gain GAIN level indicator 2 Roll the scrollwheel downward to increase the gain or upward to decrease it 100 levels 0 100 are available 1 17 1 17 1 1 17 2 1 RADAR OPERATION Reducing Sea Clutter Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals known as sea clutter The higher the waves and the higher the antenna above the water the further the clutter extends When sea clutter masks the picture reduce it by the A C SEA control either manually or automatically Note 1 When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced the sensitivity is decreased more than when only one is adjusted For that reason adjust them carefully Note 2 The echo average see 1 27 is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface However high speed targets are harder to detect than stationary
222. keel NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied so as to provide depth relative to the keel GGA Global positioning system fix data GGA hhmmss ss llII IIl a yyyyy yyy a Xxx X X X X Mx X M x xX xxxx hh CR LF UTC of position Latitude N S Longitude E W GPS quality indicator see note Number of satellite in use 00 12 may be different from the number in view Horizontal dilution of precision Antenna altitude above below mean sea level m Geoidal separation m Age of differential GPS data 10 Differential reference station ID 0000 1023 11 Checksum NOTE 0 fix not available or invalid 1 GPS SPS mode fix valid 2 differential GPS SPS mode fix valid 3 GPS PPS mode fix valid GPS_PPS 4 Real Time Kinetic Satellite system used mode with fixed integers GPS_RTK_I 5 Float RTK Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating fingers GPS_RTK_F 6 Estimated dead reckoning mode 7 Manual input mode 8 Simulator mode The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field Position data shown in green in case of 1 and 5 red in case of 0 and 6 8 12 APPENDIX GLL Geographic position latitude longitude GLL IIII III a yyyyy yyy a hhmmss ss A a hh CR LF 1 Latitude N S 2 Longitude E W 3 UTC of position 4 Status A data valid V data invalid 5 Mode indicator see note 6 Checksum NOTE Positioni
223. key or click the ALARM red and flashes At the same time an ACK box to audio alarm is produced for one second acknowledge The reference target mark disappears from the screen after the reference target alarm is acknowledged terminate tracking of TT TT NEW TARGET Tracked target has entered an acquisition Press the ALARM ACK zone The tracked target s symbol is red key or click the ALARM and flashing ACK box to acknowledge TT LOST When the system detects a loss of a Press the ALARM ACK tracked target the lost tracked target key or click the ALARM symbol appears in red and flashes At the ACK box to same time an audio alarm is produced for acknowledge one second The lost target mark disappears from the screen after the lost target alarm is acknowledged TT TARGET 95 Appears when capacity for AUTO or MAN automatically manually tracked targets is 95 full TT TARGET FULL Appears when capacity for AUTO or MAN automatically manually acquired targets is full TT SYSTEM ERROR When the TT malfunctions because of Press the ALARM ACK hardware error the screen shows this key or click the ALARM indication ACK box to acknowledge Reset power to restore normal operation 3 25 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 16 3 16 1 3 26 Trial Maneuver The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect on all tracked targets against own ship s maneuver Enter your expected course speed and time to maneuver to
224. laying a ehart a o atta 5 9 5 7 2 Chart position 5 10 GCorrec ng Gursor dala cioe pec ume aur ne dns 5 10 5 7 4 Chart land color B C and W types lt lt lt 5 11 5 8 Hiding Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter Display 5 12 5 9 UT eC mc 5 13 5 9 1 Plotting own ship s track ee eR Hk ER UR RI ERE 5 13 5 9 2 Plotting interval for other ships tracks eee enne 5 14 5 9 3 Auto target track A B C and W 5 15 5 9 4 Choosing track color B C and W 5 15 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 9 5 Erasing track from the menu on the screen 5 16 5 9 6 Erasing track with the cursor ttr eee Po ce Fe n Ek ER Daraus 5 17 5 10 WV AY OO LMU ee en ate ha qui 5 18 5 10 1 Entering 5 18 5 10 2 Editing erasing waypoints from the 440400 5 20 5 10 3 Erasing Way DO UNS cee ura u oae pto tpe itat dut 5 21 mnn 5 22 5 10 5 Displaying waypoint name and number
225. le True Bearing where the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading Course up Compass stabilized relative to ship s orientation at the time of selecting course up North up Compass stabilized with reference to north Stern up The radar image is rotated 180 Graphics and relative and true bearings are also rotated 180 True Motion TM Land objects and sea are stationary Requires compass and speed data Choosing presentation mode By keyboard Press the MODE key consecutively to select presentation mode desired The PRESENTATION MODE box shows the current presentation mode See the illustration below By trackball Left click the PRESENTATION MODE box at the top left corner of the screen to select a presentation mode HEAD UP RM Other modes STERN UP HEAD UP TB RM COURSE UP RM NORTH UP RM NORTH UP TM PRESENTATION MODE box Loss of gyrocompass signal When the compass signal is lost GYRO appears in red in the Alert Box the presentation mode automatically becomes head up and TT and AIS targets map and chart are erased After restoring the compass signal HEADING SET appears in the Alert Box Then stop the alarm with the ALARM ACK key or the ALARM ACK box and check the GYRO data 1 17 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 12 2 Description of presentation modes Head up mode The head up mode is a display in which the line connecting own ship and the top of the display indica
226. le are shown 6 WR OWN TRACK Not available on IMO type 7 WR TARGET TRACKk 8 WR SETTING DATA 9 WR INSTALL DATA 0 NEXT CARD menu 5 33 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 4 Select DRIVE SELECT 5 Select appropriate drive 6 Select data to record one item among 4 9 For example select 4 WR MARK The display then looks something like the one below WR MARK 1 BACK 2 NAME See note below M0000000 CARD WRITE menu Note The file name is composed of a single alphabet the file type and seven alphanumeric characters the file number The file type is denoted as follows M Radar map mark 20 000 points W Waypoint nav line Waypoint 20 points nav line 30 lines T Own track 20 000 points A Targettrack 1 000 points x 15 targets S Setting data all operating information other than initial settings I Installation data initial settings 7 Use the scrollwheel and the left button to enter file name You may use up to seven alphanumeric characters 8 After entering the last digit of the file name the selected item is recorded The message WR CARD DATA is shown during recording 5 34 5 13 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Replaying Data Video plotter data track marks etc may be replayed on the screen This is useful for analyzing past data 1 Insert memory card into the appropriate slot in an I F card unit 2 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 3 Select 6 CARD CARD 1 2
227. line name Select 3 NAV LINE NAME Use the scrollwheel to change name To replace waypoints in a nav line do the following 1 Select 4 NAV DATA ENTRY 2 Push the scrollwheel to select the waypoint you wish to replace 3 Roll the scrollwheel to set new waypoint number To delete the waypoint from the nav line enter 000 4 Push the scrollwheel to finish Push the right button several times to close the menu 5 25 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 11 3 5 26 Nav line list The nav line list which shows all nav lines registered may be displayed as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 8 NAV LINE WPT 3 Select 9 NAV LINE LIST NAV LINE LIST 1 30 BACK L TOP 01 LINE 1 001 002 003 004 005 006 0 NEXT L LAST NAV LINE LIST 4 To go to a next page select 0 NEXT To return to a previous page select 1 BACK 5 Push the right button as many times as necessary to close the menu 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 11 4 Erasing a nav line 30 nav lines may be entered You may erase unnecessary nav lines as shown below A nav line that is currently in use cannot be erased Erasing individual nav lines 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 8 NAV LINE WPT 3 Select 8 NAV LINE SET NAV LINE SET BACK NAV LINE NO SELECT 01 NAV LINE NAME NAV LINE ENTRY CLEAR DATA NO YES NAV LINE SET menu Select 2 NAV LINE NO SELECT Use the scrol
228. llowing 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 1 ECHO ECHO 1 BACK 2 29 ECHO REJ OFF ON 3 TUNE INITIALIZE 4 PM OFF ON 5 SART OFF ON 6 WIPER OFF 1 2 7 ECHO AREA Not available on IMO or A type CIRCLE WIDE ALL 8 PICTURE SELECT 9 STC RANGE 00 3 Select 5 SART 4 Select ON With SART turned on radar functions are set as follows Range 12 nm Pulselength Long Echo Stretch Off Noise Rejector Off Echo Averaging Off Interference Rejector Off Performance Monitor Off RAIN Off 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu SART appears at the bottom of the display when this feature is active Be sure to turn off the SART feature when SART detection is no longer your objective 2 6 2 3 3 2 RADAR OBSERVATION General remarks on receiving SARTs SART range errors When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible when the SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm the position at which the first dot is displayed may be as much as 0 64 nm beyond the true position of the SART When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also the first of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position Radar bandwidth This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with the range scale and the associated pulselength Narrow bandwidths of 3 5 MHz are used with long pulses on l
229. lwheel to enter nav line no in two digits Select 5 CLEAR DATA Push the scrollwheel or the left button to delete the nav line Push the right button three times to close the menu BRUST IE 5 27 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Erasing all nav lines 1 Left click the MENU box 2 Select 5 PLOTTER 3 Select 8 DATA ERASE DATA ERASE BACK OWN TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL TARGET TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL MARK ALL ERASE NO YES WPT ALL ERASE NO YES NAV LINE ALL ERASE NO YES OWN TRACK DELETE 2POINTS AREA Colors not shown on IMO type TARGET TRACK DELETE Not available on IMO type 2POINTS AREA DATA ERASE menu 4 Select 6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE 5 Select YES to erase all nav lines and their data 6 Push the right button three times to close the menu 5 11 5 Setting up nav lines Nav lines can be set up as follows Left click the MENU box Select 8 NAV LINE WPT Select 2 NAV LINE DATA Select INTERNAL DATA Select 5 NAV LINE WIDTH Use the scrollwheel to enter the width for the nav line from 0 0 9 99 nm A pair of orange lines mark the width of the nav line Not available on IMO type 5 28 3 Not available on IMO or A type NAV LINE WPT 1 2 BACK 2 NAV LINE DATA OFF EXT DATA INTERNAL DATA WPT MARK NAV LINE SELECT FORWARD REVERSE SKIP NEXT WPT NAV LINE WIDTH 0 00NM WPT SET
230. ly tuned but 1 Deteriorated magnetron poor sensitivity 3 Dirt on radiator face 4 Water ingress to the waveguide or other feeder line 5 Second trace echo rejection is ON Range changed but radar 1 Defective range key picture not changing 2 SPU board 3 Video freeze up Continued on next page 6 8 1 With the radar transmitting on 48 nm range check magnetron current If current is below normal magnetron may be defective Replace it 2 Check MIC detecting current If it is below normal value MIC may have become detuned MIC must be tuned 3 Clean the radiator surface 4 Remove water from the feeder line 5 Disable the second trace echo rejector referring to section 1 38 1 Try to hit RANGE and keys several times If unsuccessful replacement of keypad may be required 2 Replace SPU board 3 Turn off and on radar 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING Advanced troubleshooting con t Problem Probable causes or check Remedy points Interference rejector is SPU board Replace SPU board inoperative interference rejection level not displayed Echo stretch is ineffective SPU board Replace SPU board neither ES1 ES2 nor ES3 is displayed Range rings are not 1 Adjust the brilliance of 1 Replace associated circuit board if displayed range rings on the unsuccessful BRILL menu to see if intensity is increased 2 SPU board 2 Replace SPU board Poor discrimination in Sea
231. m antenna unit FAR 2827W 100 115 VAC 3 2A 220 230 VAC 1 6A 21375 28375 28375 100 115 VAC 3 0A 220 230 VAC 1 5A S band 200 220 380 440 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 Processor unit 3 Antenna unit Model Antenna voltage input 100 kt 200 VAC 380 VAC 220 VAC 220 VAC 440 VAC 93 50 Hz 93 50 Hz 93 50 Hz 03 60 Hz 03 60 Hz 220 VAC 440 VAC HSC HSC HSC 03 60 Hz 03 60 Hz FAR 2137S BB 3 0A 1 5A 3 5A 3 5A 1 7A 28375 3 0A 1 5A 4 Console 115 230 VAC 19 50 60 Hz Single phase RU 1803 440 VAC 1 phase 50 60 Hz Triple phase RU 5693 100 VAC 3 phase 60 Hz RU 6522 220 VAC 3 phase 50 Hz RU 5466 1 440 VAC 3 phase 50 Hz 5 Transformer option 6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1 Ambient temperature Display processor unit transceiver control power supply unit 15 C to 55 C 25 C to 55 C storage 70 C less than 95 at 40 C Antenna unit 2 Relative humidity 3 Degree of protection Display processor control power supply unit IPXO Monitor unit 170C Front panel IP56 Rear panel IP20 MU 190 MU 231 IP22 Antenna unit IPX6 4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed 4 SP 3 E3519S01P M F U R U N O 7 COLOR FAR 21x7 BB 28x7 SERIES 1 Display unit MU 201 231CR Chassis 2 5GY5 1 5 Panel N3 0 fixed 2 Monitor units N2 5 fixed 3 Processor unit Power supply unit 2 5GY5 1 5 4 Control unit 5 Antenna uni
232. mearing of stationary targets b Relative target trails Targets moving relative to own ship 1 Right click the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom right corner of the screen to open the TRAIL menu TRAIL MENU 1 TRAIL MODE REL TRUE 2 TRAIL GRAD SINGLE MULTI 3 NARROW TRAIL OFF 1 2 4 TRAIL LEVEL 1 2 3 4 5 TRAIL RESTART OFF ON 6 TRAIL COPY OFF ON 7 OS TRAIL OFF 1 2 8 TRAIL LENGTH NORMAL 12H 24H 48H 9 TRAIL HIDE START 00 00 END 00 00 2 0 TRAIL COLOR 3 B C and W types 2 Select 1 TRAIL MODE 3 Select TRUE or REL 4 Push the right button to close the menu Shown when 8 TRAIL LENGTH is selected to other than NORMAL Other than IMO and A types W type does not show 48H C types only 1 47 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 30 2 Trail time 1 30 3 1 48 Trail time the trail plotting interval may be selected as follows 1 Selectthe arrow in the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom right corner of the screen TRAIL gt TRUE S or G or REL S Sea stablized G Ground stabilized Trail time setting TRAIL MODE box 2 Push the left button to select the trail time as below Control Available setting Left button OFF 15 sec 30 sec 1 min 3 min 6 min 15 min 30 min CONT inuous Scrollwheel OFF 15 sec 30 sec 1 30 min 30 sec intervals CONT inuous The timer above the TRAIL MODE box counts up the trail time and is erase
233. menu page 2 Select 2 FILE DELETE FILE DELETE 1 1 BACK T2003410 W2003126 A20035311 S20030129 S20030118 FILE DELETE display Select the file to delete The message DELETE CARD DATA appears while data is being deleted 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic system This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below A WARNING Do not open the equipment Hazardous voltage which can cause electrical shock exists inside the equipment Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment Turn off the radar power switch before servicing the antenna unit Post a warn ing sign near the switch indicating it should not be turned on while the antenna unit is being serviced Prevent the potential risk of being struck by the rotating antenna A transmitting radar antenna emits electromag netic waves which can be harmful particularly the eyes Wear a safety belt and hard hat when working on the antenna unit Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar antenna mast NOTICE Do not apply paint anti corrosive sealant or contact spray to coating or plastic parts of the equipment
234. n echo averaging are disabled LOG The indication LOG in red If the SDME has failed use another appears and the and the speed speed sensor indication shows kn if the speed signal is lost more than 30 s For BT error CPA and TCPA for AIS are not calculated EPFS The indication EPFS in red Acknowledge indication by pressing appears and the position display the ALARM ACK key or left clicking shows all asterisks if the position the ALARM ACK box Restore signal input is lost more than 30 s to remove indication Message cannot Radar map AIS and echo be erased if position signal is missing averaging are disabled itis automatically erased when the signal is restored DATUM For the IMO type the indication Acknowledge indication by pressing DATUM in red appears if the datum is other than WGS 84 or WGS 84 is not input AIS is inoperative with datum other than WGS 84 the ALARM ACK key or left clicking the ALARM ACK box Use WGS 84 datum 1 84 1 RADAR OPERATION Alarm name visual indication Visual alarm reason To quit alarm status AIS ALARM See section 4 15 DUAL RADAR ALARM Non IMO only EXT RADAR External radar is in standby Set external radar in transmit to erase STBY indication EXT RADAR External radar malfunction Restore external radar to normal ERROR condition to erase indication EXT RADAR Problem with headi
235. n MG5436 Motor 109P0824H602 Transceiver unit RTR 081A cover opened AP 42 APPENDIX Antenna unit RSB 098 099 100 101 102 for FAR 2137S BB 2837S Behind plate MSS 7497 Board 200 220 V MSS 7497 A Board 380 440 V MIC Assy TB Board Motor RU 9760A 03P9349 RM 7398 Behind plate RSB 098 21 26 rpm 200 220V 3 Diode Limiter RM 7435 RU 9426 RSB 099 21 26 rpm 380 440V 34 Circulator RM 9519F RC 6584S RSB 100 45 rpm 220V 3 50 Hz RM 9520F RSB 101 45 rpm 220V 3 60 Hz RM 9521F RSB 102 45 rpm 440V 36 60 Hz Antenna unit RSB 098 099 100 101 102 cover opened AP 43 APPENDIX Magnetron RFC Board MG5223F 03P9346 MD Board 03P9244 Pulse Transformer RT 9773 Antenna unit RSB 098 099 100 101 102 cover opened AP 44 APPENDIX Antenna unit RSB 104 105 for FAR 2837SW Motor RM 7398 For RSB 104 21 rpm 200 V 3 50 Hz For RSB 104 26 rpm 220 V 30 60 Hz RM 7345 For RSB 105 21 rpm 380 V 3 50 Hz For RSB 105 26 rpm 440 V 3 60 Hz TB Board 03P9349 Antenna unit RSB 104 105 cover opened F MSS Board MSS 7497 200 220V 3 MSS 7497 A 380 440V 3 BP GEN Board 03P9347 Antenna unit RSB 104 105 cover opened AP 45 APPENDIX Transceiver unit RTR 082 for FAR 2837SW MD Board Pulse Transformer 03P9244 RT 9273 RF PWR Board Magnetron 03P9348 MG5223F RFC Board Beneath plate
236. n example 1 Left click ALARM1 or ALARM2 box whichever alarm you wish to put the cursor jumps into the effective display area and SET appears inside the ALARM box selected ALARM 1 ALARM 2 ALARM boxes 2 Use the trackball to put the cursor on point A then push the left button 3 Use the trackball to put the cursor on point B then push the left button WORK replaces SET in the ALARM box The target alarm zone s lines are shown in dashed lines Target alarm zone 000 349 350 010 Other alarm zone examples 20 e Point B Point A 240 E Point B Target alarm zone 1 39 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 23 2 1 23 3 1 40 Note 1 If you wish to create a target alarm zone having a 360 degree coverage around own ship set point B in almost the same direction as point A Note 2 Two target alarm zones may be set Note however that the oe target alarm zone is available only when the 1 target alarm zone is active Note 3 When the target alarm zone is not within the range in use the indication UP RNG appears to the right of the ALARM box In this case select a range that will display the target alarm zone Acknowledging the target alarm A target in the target alarm zone produces both visual flashing and audible beep alarms To silence the audio alarm press the ALARM ACK key on the full keyboard or select the appropriate ALARM box then push the left button The
237. n marks 1 55 erasing 1 57 stabilization 1 57 OS POSN box 1 72 Own ship 1 96 Own ship symbol 1 60 Own ship 1 82 P AP 30 Parts location AP 37 Past position display oH 4 12 ger 3 18 PAST POSN 3 18 4 12 PI line boxes 1 52 PI lines displaying erasing 1 52 1 53 number oflines 1 54 orientation 1 53 1 54 reference 1 53 resetting 1 54 PICTURE DOK 2 1 64 Picture setup RAE 1 64 default settings 1 66 disabling unnecessary 1 67 user programming 1 64 user settings 1 66 POSION uu aaa igual 1 72 POWER switch 1 1 Presentation mode CHOOSING 1 17 description 1 18 PRESENTATION MODE box 1 17 Pulseleng
238. n your area the lost target alarm may sound frequently In this case you may wish to have the alarm ignore lost targets whose range speed class or length are below the threshold value you specify 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu 3 Select 8 AIS LOST FILTER AIS LOST FILTER BACK 2 MAX RANGE OFF ON ONM MIN SHIP SPEED OFF ON 0 1kn EXCEPT CLASS B OFF ON MIN SHIP LENGTH OFF ON OM AIS LOST FILTER menu 4 10 2 4 AIS OPERATION 4 Setitems 2 5 as appropriate referring the description below MAX RANGE Any AIS lost targets beyond this range will not trigger the lost target alarm MIN SHIP SPEED Any AIS lost targets slower than this setting will not trigger the lost target alarm EXCEPT CLASS B Select ON to prevent trigger lost B class AIS lost target MIN SHIP LENGTH Any AIS lost targets whose length is shorter than this setting will not trigger the lost target alarm 5 Push the right button several times to close the menu Enabling disabling the lost target alarm The LOST TARGET ALARM box at the bottom right corner enables and disables the lost target alarm Select OFF ALL or FILT as appropriate OFF Disable the alarm ALL Getthe alarm against all lost targets FILT Get the alarm against the AIS targets whose criteria meet the settings on the AIS LOST FILTER menu CPA AUTO ACTIVATE OFF CPA AUTO ACTIVATE box 4 15 4 A
239. nction keys 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 9 CUSTOMIZE TEST then push the scrollwheel CUSTOMIZE TEST BACK DATA BOX F1 F2 F3 F4 OPERATION TEST Q N CUSTOMIZE TEST menu 3 Select 3 F1 4 F2 5 F3 or 6 F4 whichever function key you want to set For example select 3 F1 then push the left button F1 BACK ECHO STD KEY TT AIS OPERATION PICTURE F1 menu 1 RADAR OPERATION 4 Select appropriate category ECHO STD KEY TT AIS OPERATION or PICTURE Refer to the menus below to select appropriate category ECHO BACK PICTURE IR ES EAV NOISE REJ ANT SELECT PULSE LENGTH A C SEA SELECT AUTO RAIN SELECT TUNE SELECT ANT HEIGHT SEA CONDITION 2ND ECHO REJ PM SART WIPER TT AIS BACK DISP TT DISP AIS TARGET DATA amp ACQ PAST POSN INTERVAL REF MARK CPA LIMIT CPA TCPA 71 22 TARGET LIST SORT TRIAL MANEUVER ASSOCIATION AIS MESSAGE TRIAL MODE CHANGE AIS SCALED SYMBOL PICTURE BACK PICTURE1 PICTURE2 PICTURE3 PICTURE4 NEAR FAR NEAR BUOY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR COAST Not available on IMO type STD KEY BACK ALARM ACK STBY TX HL OFF EBL OFFSET MODE OFF CENTER CU TM RESET PI LINE VECTOR TIME VECTOR MODE TARGET LIST TRAIL BRILL MARK MENU RANGE UP RANGE DOWN ACQ TARGET DA
240. ne and input the navigation data route planning and monitoring data The radar map may contain 20 000 points of data The map data can be saved to facilitate repeated use on a routine navigation area The user can create a radar map on real time while using the radar for navigation or at leisure time at anchor or while the radar is not being used Place of a map can be made for any waterways apart from the actual own ship location The radar map does not affect any radar function Showing hiding the radar map display From menu 1 Use the trackball to select the MARK box 2 Push the right button to open the MARK menu MARK MENU 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA 2 MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE 8 MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 000 00 N 000 000 00 E 9 MAP DISPLAY OFF ON 0 MAP MARK COLOR Not available on IMO RED GRN BLU YEL or A type CYA MAG WHT MARK menu 3 Select 9 MAP DISPLAY 4 Select ON or OFF as applicable 5 Push the right button to close the menu From mark legend MARK gt Place cursor on text and left click to hide show map alternately 5 3 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 4 2 5 4 Inscribing radar map marks and lines 1 2 Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the display MARK gt Mark type g
241. ng data at Re set external radar s heading data HDG SET external radar to erase indication OTHER ALARM ANCHOR Ship has drifted more than a Acknowledge indication by pressing WATCH threshold value the ALARM key or left clicking the ALARM ACK box ARRIVAL Own ship has arrived to a Acknowledge indication by pressing waypoint the ALARM ACK key or left clicking the ALARM ACK box CHECK INT SW Interswitch malfunction Acknowledge indication by pressing the ALARM ACK key or left clicking the ALARM ACK box Check interswitch DEPTH Depth is lower or higher than Acknowledge indication by pressing threshold value the ALARM ACK key or left clicking the ALARM ACK box HEADING SET Heading signal has been Press the ALARM ACK key to erase restored the message Match the on screen HDG readout with the actual compass reading if necessary MEMORY CARD Memory card is full Acknowledge indication by pressing FULL the ALARM ACK key or left clicking the ALARM ACK box TARGET ALARM A target has entered or exited Acknowledge indication by pressing the target alarm zone Target the ALARM ACK key or left clicking flashes the ALARM ACK box WATCH WATCH 0 00 Press the ALARM ACK key or click WATCH appears and time count the WATCH box with the left button The WATCH box is displayed in freezes at 0 00 i normal video and the timer is reset XTE Own ship is off course more than Acknowledge indication by pressing
242. ng system Mode indicator A Autonomous D Differential E Estimated dead reckoning M Manual input S Simulator N Data not valid The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field The Status field shall be set to V invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A Autonomous and D Differential The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not be null fields Position data shown in green in case of A data valid and A and D red in case of V data invalid E M S and N GNS GNSS fix data GNS hhmmss ss lIII IIl a yyyyy yyy a C C XX X X X XX X X X hh CR LF 1 UTC of position 2 Latitude N S 3 Longitude E W 4 Mode indicator 5 Total number of satllite in use 00 99 6 HDOP 7 Antenna altitude metres re mean sea level geoid 8 Geoidal separation 9 Age of differential data 10 Differential reference station ID 11 Checksum AP 13 APPENDIX HDT Heading true HDT x x T hh CR LF 1 Heading degrees true 2 Checksum MTW Water temperature MTW x x C hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 1 Temperature degrees C 2 Checksum MWV Wind speed and angle MWV x x a x x a A hh CR LF 1 Wind angle 0 to 359 degrees 2 Reference R relative T true 3 Wind speed 4 Wind speed units KN M N 5 Status A data valid V data invalid 6 Checksum Data is used in case of A data valid Data is not used in case of V da
243. nterrerence RU oto E 1 43 1 26 Echo SU Stee P 1 43 1 27 AVeragiPlQ 1 44 1 28 Noise Rejector cc rtt eth de ERR e Rn 1 45 DALAI 1 46 TOO Pare i E ATE Sas 1 47 1 30 Tr eor relative x u d p ete Ete re e E ec B e EARS 1 47 1 30 2 Trail time ere p ei ee te Pie 1 48 1 30 Trail y u 1 48 1 30 4 Saving copying target trails icis inte 1 49 1 30 5 Trail Igual cuoio io eerta tool SS s als eet 1 50 1 30 6 Narrow trails B C and W 1 50 1 30 7 Longer trails B C and W types ertt t e RR ten 1 51 1 30 8 Temporarily removing trails from the 1 51 1 30 9 Trail stabilization in true 1 51 1 30 T0 Er amp sing trallssa toni e eeu ta Pte t b ge dio ne 1 51 1 31 Parallel Index LINCS u u u u u 1 52 1 31 1 Displaying erasing PI lines 1 52 1 31 2 Adjusting PI line orientation PI line interval 1 53 1 31 3 PI line bea
244. numeral key a To clear lind of n mertc data pressed at step 3 to select appropriate Use the CANCEL TRAILS key option then press the ENTER MARK key to Switch between plus and minus North and South or East and West confirm your selection Use the 2 key 5 Press the MENU key to close the menu 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 6 Main menu operation by trackball 1 Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen The guidance box at the bottom right corner see the illustration at the bottom of the next page for location now reads DISP MAIN MENU 2 Push the left button to display the MAIN menu MAIN MENU Echo processing functions MARK Mainly turns markers Sets guard alarm functions outputs alarm signal ALARM Sets TT and AIS functions TT AIS PLOTTER CARD Chart and track functions Memory card functions NAV DATA Turns nav data on off NAV LINE WPT CUSTOMIZE TEST Processes nav lines and waypoints Customizes operation executes diagnostics 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MAIN menu 3 Roll the scrollwheel or trackball to select a menu and push the left button For example select the 2 MARK menu MARK 1 BACK 2 OWN SHIP MARK OFF MIN SCALED 3 STERN MARK OFF ON 4 PI LINE 5 ANCHOR WATCH OFF ON 0 0NM 6 DROP MARK OFF ON 7 INS MARK 8 EBL OFFSET BASE ST
245. o Yes 4 Push the right button to close the menu PI Parallel Index Lines PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating Up to six sets of PI lines are available depending on the maximum number of PI lines selected on the menu Max 1 PI line Six sets of PI lines PI1 PI6 Max 2 3 or 6 PI lines Four sets of PI lines PI1 PIA 7 7 You may control the orientation and interval of the PI lines from the PI line box which is at the lower left corner Displaying erasing PI lines By keyboard 1 With the menu closed press the INDEX LINE key The guidance box shows DISP PI LINE 2 While watching the PI line number box press and hold the INDEX LINE key to select a PI line Press the key again to display or erase the PI line selected PI line number 1 ON Status ON or OFF PI line orientation 032 0 T Boxes not shown when PI line interval 5 60NM P line is OFF PI line boxes By trackball 1 Select the PI line number box and use the trackball to select a PI line number 2 Push the left button to turn the PI line on or off as appropriate 1 31 2 1 31 3 1 RADAR OPERATION Adjusting PI line orientation PI line interval 4 5 If not
246. o indicate that it is not reliable RECEIVE Not receiving AIS data from own AIS VDO message TRANSMIT ERROR Could not send AIS message Water tracking speed in use 4 26 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 1 5 2 General The video plotter does the following functions e Plots own and other ships tracks Plotting of other ships tracks not available on IMO type e Enters waypoints nav lines and marks e Creates and displays radar maps e Records data onto memory cards optional card interface required e t uses two types of memory cards a memory card RAM card for storing own ship and other ship s tracks and marks and a digital chart card ROM card e 30 nav lines may be stored and each line may contain up to 30 waypoints One nav line may be shown on the display 200 waypoints are available Own ship and other ship tracks may be stored at a selected interval e Charts A B C and W types are superimposed on the radar picture without disturbing the radar observation The chart area is dependent on the radar range in use Display Modes This radar has display modes as follows e IMO Atype Radar Radar Plotter Anchor Watch e W type Radar Radar Plotter Plotter Use the DISPLAY MODE box to select a mode When the video plotter mode is displayed more than five seconds the radar automatically goes into standby Note 1 Display mode cannot be selected when the menu is open Close the
247. ode sea or ground stabilization in True Motion Auto tracking on all acquired targets Tracking 5 10 pts on all targets Capacity 1000 targets Tracking 10 pts on all targets Time of vector Off 3 1 50 minutes 20 000 pts in radar mode 6000 pts on IC card in chart mode 2 zones Selectable from menu 0 98 XN5A 2 1 XN12AF 1 5 XN20AF 1 2 XN24AF Head up Cursor Gyro North up Course up True Motion Auto or Manual acquisition 100 targets in 0 2 24 32 nm Synchro signal 20 100 VDC 20 135 VAC 50 60 400 500 Hz Stepper signal 20 100 V built in interface option required AD 10 format or IEC 61162 2 IEC 61162 1 IEC 61162 2 SP 2 E3519S01P M F U R U INI O FAR 21x7 BB 28x7 SERIES ABK ACK ALR BWC BWR DBK DBS DBT DPT DTM GGA GLL HDT MTW MWV RMB RMC RTE THS VBW VDM VDO VDR VHW VTG VWR VWT WPL ZDA 5 Output data sentences ABM ACK ALR BBM OSD RSD TLB TLL TTD TTM VSD 4 Input data sentences 5 POWER SOURCE 1 Monitor unit MU 201CR 24 VDC 2 3 A or 100 230 VAC 0 7 A 1 phase 50 60 Hz MU 231CR 24 VDC 3 2 A or 100 230 VAC 0 9 A 1 phase 50 60 Hz MU 231 1 00 230 VAC 1 0 0 6 A 1 phase 50 60 Hz MU 190 100 230 VAC 0 7 0 4 A 1 phase 50 60 Hz FAR 2117 BB 2817 24VDC 7 6A 8 5A 100 115 VAC 2 6A 3 0A 220 230 VAC 1 6A 1 7A FAR 2127 BBy2827 24 VDC 8 8A 9 7 100 115 VAC 3 0A 3 44 220 230 VAC 1 8A 1 9A Value for 42 rp
248. ones when the echo average is active Choosing method of adjustment 1 Use the trackball to select SEAAUTO or SEA MAN whichever is shown at the top of the display Level bar Place arrow inside window to adjust A C SEA p SEARO A C SEA adjustment method SEA AUTO or SEA MAN A C SEA level indicator 2 Push the left button to display SEAAUTO or SEA MAN as appropriate Automatic reduction of sea clutter Auto A C SEA allows for fine tuning of the A C SEA circuit within 20 dB Accordingly with the bar reading set to 100 gain is not lowered to minimum as with manual A C SEA on close in ranges Further the auto A C SEA level is low because the average value of the original input echo is low in areas where there are no sea surface reflections For example when the ship is alongside a quay and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and sea you can observe the size of the echoes because the STC curve changes with the size of the echoes Note The auto A C function can erase weak target echoes Adjust the control carefully watching the display By keyboard 1 Select SEA AUTO following the procedure in section 1 17 1 2 While observing the A C SEA level indicator adjust the A C SEA with the A C SEA control 100 levels are available 1 27 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 17 3 1 28 By trackball 1 Select SEAAUTO following the procedure in section 1 17 1 2 Use the trackball to place the arrow in the A C
249. ong range scales and wide bandwidths of 10 25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART Radar side lobes As the SART is approached side lobes from the radar antenna may show the SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings These can be removed by the use of the anti clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful to observe the side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the SART is near to own ship Note SART information excerpted from IMO SN Circ 197 OPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION 2 RADAR OBSERVATION 2 4 2 5 2 8 RACON A RACON is a radar beacon that emits radar receivable signals in the radar frequency spectrum X or S band There are several signal formats in general the RACON signal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo originating at a point just beyond the position of the radar beacon It has a Morse coded pattern Note that the position on the radar display is not accurate RACON RACON Radar Target Enhancer RTE An RTE is a radar transponder is mounted on navigation buoys and masts of small crafts to significantly improve their detection by radar Unlike a SART or RACON which are passive the RTE receives a radar signal amplifies it and re
250. or the net cursor 11 Steer the vessel so your ship s trail runs along the net cursor then throw the net 1 108 2 RADAR OBSERVATION 2 1 2 1 1 General Minimum and maximum ranges Minimum range The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which using a scale of 1 5 or 0 75 nm a target having an echoing area of 10 m is still shown separate from the point representing the antenna position It is mainly dependent on the pulselength antenna height and signal processing such as main bang reduction and digital quantization It is a good practice to use a shorter range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture The IMO Resolution MSC 192 79 requires the minimum range to be less than 40 m respectively This series of radars satisfy this requirement Maximum range The maximum detecting range of the radar Rmax varies considerably depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline the height of the target above the sea the size shape and material of the target and the atmospheric conditions Under normal atmospheric conditions the maximum range is equal to the radar horizon or a little shorter The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 696 because of the diffraction property of the radar signal The Rmax is given in the following equation Rinav 2 2x VhT 2 where Rmax radar horizon nautical miles h1 antenna height m
251. ortugal Slovenia Spain Sweden The Netherlands United Kingdom Iceland Norway xii Radar Type and Function Availability FOREWORD This radar series is available in five specification types to meet the requirements of Authorities and function availability depends on specification type The table below shows those functions that have limited availability This manual provides descriptions for all functions in this radar series and we have endeavored to denote in the text those functions that have limited availability For detailed information on function availability see the menu tree in the Appendix e IMO IMO compliant e A Near IMO specifications e Non Japanese fishing vessels e Japanese fishing vessels e W Washington state USA ferry Specification type and function availability Type Function IMO A B C W TT symbol No No Yes Yes Yes selection TT w o gyro No No Yes Yes Yes Acquisition Yes No No No No zone range limitation Auto target No Yes Yes Yes Yes track Chart display No Yes Yes Yes Yes Color echo No No Yes Yes Yes Cursor range No No Yes Yes No unit selection Cursor size No No Yes Yes No Dual radar No Yes Yes Yes Yes Echo area No No Yes Yes Yes configuration Mark color No No Yes Yes Yes Mark wlline No No Yes Yes Yes Pop up No No Yes Yes Yes guidance Range 0 125 0 25 Same as IMO 0 125 0 25 Same as B Same as B 0 5 0 75 1
252. osition display Displaying and erasing past position points choosing past position plot interval 1 Use the trackball to select the PAST POSN box PAST POSN REL 2MIN PAST POSN box 2 Push the left button or scrollwheel to select plot interval desired OFF 30 seconds 1 2 3 or 6 minutes Select OFF to erase all past position points and deactivate the past position display 3 11 2 3 11 3 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Past position display attributes You may select the number of past points to display per plotting interval as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 4 TT AIS TT AIS BACK 2 AZZONE STAB STAB HDG STAB NORTH AZ POLYGON OFF STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH TRIAL MANEUVER TT AIS SYMBOL CPA AUTO ACTIVATE AIS DISP FILTER AIS LOST FILTER TT LOST FILTER ASSOCIATION 3 Select 5 TT AIS SYMBOL TT AIS SYMBOL BACK TT AIS SYMBOL COLOR RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT AIS ROT TAG LIMIT 0 000 MIN TT PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 AIS PAST POSN POINTS 5 10 Not available on AIS SCALED SYMBOL IMO radar OFF ON TT AIS SYMBOL menu 4 Select 4 TT PAST POSN POINTS 5 Select 5 or 10 as appropriate 6 Push the right button three times to close the menu Past position display mode The display mode for the past position display is the same as that set for the TT vector In the true motion mode the true vector is displayed 3
253. ot available on IMO type WR INSTALL DATA NEXT N 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CARD menu page 1 4 Select 2 DRIVE SELECT 5 Select appropriate drive Note If one unit is connected the drives are from the left drive on the unit A 1 and B 2 In case of a second drive unit its drives are from the left drive on the unit C 1 and D 2 FURUNO 1 2 FURUNO 1 2 B 9 C D One Unit 2nd Unit 5 12 2 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 6 Select 0 NEXT 2 2 1 2 FILE DELETE 3 CARD INITIALIZE CARD menu page 2 7 Select 3 CARD INITIALIZE CARD INITIALIZE 1 BACK 2 INITIALIZE START NO YES CARD INITIALIZE menu 8 Select 2 INITIALIZE START to initialize the card The LED near the card flashes the CARD menu disappears and the message FORMAT CARD DATA appears Recording data When the memory becomes full the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest Further when the memory is full you cannot enter another mark or line unless you erase unnecessary marks lines or track Thus you should save important data to a memory card so as not to lose important data 1 Insert initialized memory card into appropriate drive in Card I F Unit 2 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 3 Select 6 CARD CARD 1 2 1 BACK 2 DRIVE SELECT A B C D 3 READ CARD 4 WR MARK 5 WR NAV LINEeWPT Drives availab
254. ows Ol ees Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 9 CUSTOMIZE TEST to open the CUSTOMIZE TEST menu Select 7 OPERATION Select 0 NEXT Select 3 VRM TTG Select OFF 1 2 or 1 2 as applicable and push the left button OFF NO VRM TTG display 1 TTG to VRM1 2 TTG to VRV2 1 2 TTG to VRM1 and VRM2 Push the right button four times to close the menu TRG indlestion 09 00 A POONA VRM and TTG indications 1 33 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 20 1 20 1 1 34 Measuring Bearing Use the Electronic Bearing Lines EBLs to take bearings of targets There are two EBLs No 1 and No 2 Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out from the own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture The two EBLs can be distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes the dashes on the No 2 EBL are longer Each EBL carries a range marker or a short line crossing the EBL at right angles Its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed The range marker changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of the VRM control To operate this marker rotate the VRM rotary control on the full keyboard or put the cursor in the applicable VRM box and roll the scrollwheel Measuring bearing By keyboard 1 Press the EBL ON key to display either of the EBLs Successive presses of the EBL key toggle the acti
255. ox to adjust screen brilliance 25 Brilliance level Brillance color set no For details see para 1 50 Brilliance level indicator 2 Roll the scrollwheel downward to increase brilliance or roll it upward to decrease brilliance The length of the brilliance bar increases or decreases with operation of the scrollwheel Note If nothing appears on the screen in stand by when using Control Unit RCU 015 palm control press and hold down one of the keys F1 F4 to raise the brilliance to level 50 Key set for other than USER DEFAULT See section 1 36 2 1 11 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 8 Display Modes This radar has the following display modes e IMO Atype Radar Radar Plotter Anchor Watch B C W type Radar Radar Plotter Plotter Select a display mode as below Note that a display mode cannot be selected when the menu is open 1 Use the trackball to place the arrow in the DISPLAY MODE box at the top of the screen DISPLAY XX XX display mode DISPLAY MODE box 2 Push the left button to select appropriate mode Radar Radar display Plotter Radar display plotter display Plotter Plotter display Anchor watch Plotter display Note The radar echo related boxes STBY TX PI line target alarm etc are inoperative in the anchor watch and plotter modes 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 9 On Screen Boxes and Markers Trial Maneuver Elapsed time shown
256. pes 10 2 2kn GPS 135 24 00 Depth DEPTH 22 30 TRUE 15 4 m s Wind Speed and Angle 20 WIND 159 9 T True or Relative angle 4 cue Biba 51 Tide relative to North ee section 1 41 80 full scale 10 kn 30 20 10 100 S Wind direction relative to Zoom display appears CURRENT 2 3kn 69 9 R own ship heading TEMP 16 C TTG 00 00 00 in nav data box when wPTo01 6 5NM 35 2 R nav data is turned off DATE OCT 25 03 10 00 UTC Current speed and direction Water temperature TTG WPT no range and bearing to waypoint Date time TT Target Data 3 or Zoom Referenced to ship s heading relative in head up head up TB and course up Referenced to North true in north up and true motion TT Target Data gt TT TARGET For presentation mode See Chapter 3 No 42 description see section 1 12 BRG 25 5 RNG 2 EPFS shall meet the requirements GPS DGPS E 1 of the IMO resolution MSC 112 73 PPS RTK FRTK CPA 2 9NM DR PPS RTK TCPA 12 2MIN 1 7NM and FRTK require GGA sentence BOI 20MIN TT AIS Functions Box Alert Box Messages for sensor error system error alarms and WARNING warning FORMAT CARD DATA See section 1 44 for details Data fields 1 10 1 10 1 1 10 2 1 RADAR OPERATION Tuning the Receiver Choosing the tuning method The tuning method can be selected with the box at the top of the screen 1 Select the TUNE box TUNE AUTO
257. pment DANGER Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in minor or moderate injury A Warning Caution Prohibitive Action 9 Mandatory Action A WARNING Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency RF energy which can be harmful particularly to your eyes Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance while the radar ius in operation or eexpose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance Distances at which RF radiation level of 100 50 and 10 W m are given in the table below Note If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house your administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution This is possible Ask your FURUNO representive or dealer to provide this feature Radar model Transceiver Magnetron Antenna 100W m 50W m 10W m XN12AF 0 3m 1 2m 3 7m RTR 078A MAF1565N XN20AF 0 1m 0 7m 2 2m XN24AF 0 1m 0 4m 1 5m XN12AF 0 9m 2 6m 9 0m 079 MG5436 XN20AF 0 5m 1 7m 4 6m XN24AF 0 2m 1 0m 3 3m FAR 21378 FAR 2137S BB 28376 RTR 080 MGsz23F SRRA Bim lora aan FAR 2827W XN20AF 0 4m 1
258. point Mark 2 w Z ny 290 5 280 270 2 090 260 2 100 250 5 110 2407 120 S QS 130 2 220 KOO p 210 201 np uae o 150 190 480 170 Waypoint mark Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 8 NAV LINE WPT Select 2 NAV LINE DATA Select WPT MARK Push the right button twice to close the menu DU ex 5 31 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 12 5 12 1 5 32 Recording Data The optional Card I F Unit CU 200 is required to record or replay data The CU 200 has two card slots and you can connect two units for a total of four card slots Initializing memory RAM cards Before you can use a memory RAM card it must be initialized Formatting prepares the recording surface of the card for use with the system and deletes all data recorded in the memory card You can format cards you ve used before however in which case all prior information on them is erased 1 Insert a blank memory card into the appropriate card slot in the Card I F Unit FURUNO 1 2 Card Slot Card I F unit front view 2 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 3 Select 6 CARD Note that WR in the CARD menu means Write CARD 1 2 1 BACK DRIVE SELECT A B C D READ CARD WR MARK WR NAV LINEeWPT WR OWN TRACK WR TARGET TRACK Drives available are shown WR SETTING DATA N
259. r ON as appropriate Select 5 DISP WPT NAME Select OFF or ON as appropriate Push the right button three times to close the menu 5 23 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 11 5 11 1 5 24 Nav Lines 30 nav lines may be entered and each line may have up to 30 waypoints Entering a new nav line To enter a nav line first enter appropriate waypoints Then do the following 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 8 NAV LINE WPT 3 Select 8 NAV LINE SET NAV LINE SET BACK 2 NAV LINE NO SELECT 01 NAV LINE NAME NAV LINE ENTRY CLEAR DATA NO YES NAV LINE SET menu Select 2 NAV LINE NO SELECT Use the scrollwheel to enter nav line no in two digits Select 3 NAV LINE NAME Use the scrollwheel to enter a name Select 4 NAV LINE ENTRY Use the scrollwheel to enter waypoint numbers in three digits Select numeral and push it to set 10 To enter another nav line select 0 BACK to return to the NAV LINE SET menu then repeat steps 4 9 11 To finish push the right button several times to close the menu ce OO el OP Or 5 11 2 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Editing a nav line Follow the procedure below to edit a nav line Before editing a nav line it must be disabled See section 5 11 6 Qy Ot eo Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 8 NAV LINE WPT Select 8 NAV LINE SET Select 2 NAV LINE NO SELECT Use the scrollwheel to enter nav line number to edit To edit nav
260. rack both the closet and most distant edges of the echo At the end of the scanning of the echo the discriminator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular extent subtended by the echo If the echo is larger than a ship sized echo in range extent and or angular width adjusted as a function of range it is declared to be a coastline and the closet edge is put into memory as a map of the area 3 TARGET TRACKING TT This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship sized echoes beyond the closest coast outline Five consecutive scans of coastal outline are retained in memory to allow for signal variation All smaller echoes are declared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to provide precise range and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan This range bearing data is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan to scan for consistency When it is determined to be as consistent as a real target automatic acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated Continued tracking and subsequent calculation develop the relative course and speed of the target The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship s gyro and speed inputs and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily computed by vector summing of the relative motion with own ship s course and speed The resulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the tracked targets Th
261. rd this product Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste For disposal in the USA see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance http www eiae org for the correct method of disposal How to discard a used battery Some FURUNO products have a battery ies To see if your product has a battery see the chapter on Maintenance Follow the instructions below if a battery is used Tape the and terminals of battery before disposal to prevent fire heat generation caused by short circuit In the European Union The crossed out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must not be discarded in standard trash or at a trash site Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive Cd 2006 66 EU In the USA The Mobius loop symbol three chasing arrows indicates that SY SY Ni Cd and lead acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled eS Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws Ni Cd Pb In the other countries There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol The number of symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS A SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The operator and installer must read the applicable safety instructions before attempting to install or operate the equi
262. red Off centered display 3 Push the left button to off center the DEF G eres a sweep origin 4 To cancel the off center function push the left button when the guidance box reads OFF CENTER EXIT Note When the conditions shown below are met offcenter cannot be cancelled This is because the radar antenna position is located at a position greater than 75 of the effective radar display Own ship marker is large The distance between antenna position and conning position is large Short distance display range To cancel the offcenter first select a larger range then cancel the offcenter 1 25 1 26 1 RADAR OPERATION Interference Rejector Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another shipborne radar operating in the same frequency band It is seen on the screen as a number of bright spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usually curved spoke like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture Activating the interference rejector circuit can reduce this type of interference The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit It compares the received signals over successive transmissions and reduces randomly occurring signals There are three levels of interference rejection depending on the number of transmissions that are correlated Interference To adjust the interference rejector left click IR indication at the left side of the screen to sele
263. restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications e The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the target Delay is on the order of 15 30 seconds for high relative speed 30 60 seconds for low relative speed e Display accuracy is affected by the following Echo intensity Radar transmission pulsewidth Radar bearing error Gyrocompass error Course change own ship and target The data generated by TT AIS and video plotter are intended for reference only Refer to official nautical charts for detailed and up to date information 3 1 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 2 Controls for TT Keyboard The TT uses the keys shown below 2 3 EBL VRM MODE 4 5 6 CUITM INDEX RESET LINE 7 8 9 VECTOR TARGET TIME MODE LIST CANCEL 0 ENTER TRAILS BRILL MARK m w Ia F 1 F CENTER F4 VECTOR ES MENU F3 RANGE ALARM ACK STBY O gt gt gt 2 gt 2 60 30 mm m gt gt ACQ Manually acquires a target TARGET DATA Displays data on tracked target chosen with the trackball TARGET CANCEL Terminates tracking of tracked target chosen with the trackball Control unit RCU 014 Trackball With the cursor inside the effective display area
264. riable range marker 1 32 1 19 3 VRM unit of measurement B and 1 33 T T0 4T T6 to VRM indicatiON siet tob dtu bte ts 1 33 1 20 Measuring Bearirig yasa bte dede 1 34 1 20 1 Measuring DEALING dde nion aei testigo tubo oct enata tiros bed 1 34 1 20 2 True or relative bearirig ioter haeo Greater n RR lal ient delete dba das 1 35 1 21 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL 2 11 111 1 36 1 21 1 How to assess risk of collision by the offset 8 1 36 1 21 2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL 1 37 TABLE OF CONTENTS vi 1 22 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets 1 38 1 23 Target ou rtr eh FEE as ee 1 39 1 23 1 How to set atargetalarm eoo ena Fea 1 39 1 23 2 Acknowledging the target 1 40 1 23 3 Deactivating a target alarm cde autc Re TE an 1 40 1 23 4 Target alarm attributes tet feme sec be M Read 1 41 1 24 Off Centering the Display ern rr eee pene 1 42 1225 I
265. ring reference etenim 1 53 1 31 4 Maximum number of PI lines to 1 54 1S 12 PING orientati fs P EE 1 54 1 316 RESCUING PLINE S u neto rrt 1 54 1 32 Ongdin IS SERERE RERO ER TONNES 1 55 1 32 1 Entering origin marks ruine erupit rH ER RR 1 55 T1 32 2 OrrginirmariestablliZaligli redu es medic 1 57 1 32 3 Deleting individual origin 1 57 1 33 ZOOM Bids seth 1 58 1 34 MAN CES tasu maa dc Leste adc 1 59 jJ MESH 1 59 1 04 2 Sterni marke a u hi ies 1 59 1 34 3 North marker E baa ey dawnt even 1 59 154 4 OWA SDID Symbol met oe ct o tiae detail eitis 1 60 1 34 5 Barge marker re Secs lea covey obe Sere Ie AR SRL EXE 1 61 mark beret ioo Cni eren tt 1 61 1 35 Automatic Picture Setup According to Navigation Purpose 1 62 1 35 1 Selecting a picture setup option 2 0 0 00 00000000000 1 64 1 35 2 Programming and saving picture Setups 1 64 1 35 3 Restoring user settirigs ue efi ree d I dr e Rx REX LE 1 66 1 35 4 Restoring
266. row in the TT ACQ MODE box at the right side to show the TT TARGET menu TT TARGET MENU TT SELECT MANUAL100 AUTO 25 AUTO 50 AUTO 75 AUTO 100 ALL CANCEL NO YES REF TARGET VECTOR OFF ON TT TARGET menu 2 Select 1 TT SELECT 3 Select MANUAL 100 AUTO 25 AUTO 50 or AUTO 75 as appropriate For details see the table on page 3 5 4 Push the right button to close the menu Manually acquiring targets By keyboard 1 Put the cursor on the target you want to acquire 2 Press the ACQ key By trackball 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to show TT TARGET DATA amp in the guidance box 2 Putthe cursor on the target you want to acquire 3 Push the left button to acquire the target 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 8 The plotting symbol is drawn by broken lines during the initial acquisition stage A vector appears in about one minute after acquisition indicating the target s motion trend If the target is consistently detected for three minutes the plotting symbol changes to a solid circle If acquisition fails the target plotting symbol blinks and disappears shortly TT Symbol Immediately after acquisition this plotting symbol is shown broken lines x Within minute after acquisition vector appears to show trend of movement Within three minutes after acquisition the plotting symbol changes to a small circle indicating stea
267. rring to section tracked correctly targets in sea clutter 1 17 and 1 18 Tuning adjusted but 2 trace echo Turn off the 2 trace echo rejector referring to poor sensitivity rejector on or dirt on section 1 38 radiator face e Clean the radiator face 6 6 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 67 Advanced level Troubleshooting This section describes how to cure hardware and software troubles that should be carried out by qualified service personnel Note 1 This radar equipment contains complex modules in which fault diagnosis and repair down to component level are not practicable by users Note 2 When replacement of the SPU board is necessary the previous settings can be transferred to new SPU board as follows Use the CU 200 to save settings to a RAM card After replacing the SPU board load the entire contents of the RAM card to the radar referring to section 5 12 for the procedure Advanced troubleshooting Problem Probable causes or check Remedy points Power turned but radar 1 Blown fuse 1 Replace blown fuse soos ot operate 2 Mains voltage polarity 2 Correct wiring and input voltage 3 Power supply board 3 Replace power supply board Brilliance adjusted but no SPU board Replace SPU board picture Antenna not rotating 1 Antenna drive 1 Replace antenna drive mechanism mechanism 2 Defective antenna drive 2 Press relay reset button motor relay thermal relay K2 200 220 380
268. rt pulse 16 mm h rain pulse 4 rain long pulse 2 4 mm h rain short pulse 16 rain long pulse Original Range of First Detection NM Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at S band a 16 mm h rain short pulse 4 mm h rain short pulse 16 mm h rain long pulse 4mmhh rain long pulse 4 mm h rain short pulse 4 mm h rain long pulse lt 16 mm h rain short pulse 16 mm h rain long pulse ar Y 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Original Range of First Detection NM Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at X band The author thanks the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC for permission to reproduce Information from its International Standard IEC 62388 ed 1 0 2007 All such extracts are copyright of IEC Geneva Switzerland All rights reserved Further information on the IEC is available from www iec ch IEC has no responsibility for the placement and context in which the extracts and contents are reproduced by the author nor is IEC in any way responsible for the other content or accuracy therein IEC 62388 ed 1 0 Copyright 2007 IEC Geneva Switzerland www iec ch 1 30 How to read the graph Using the X band graph as an example here is how to read the graphs A radar target detected in rain on the 8 nm range scale can only be detected at the ranges shown below 4 mm h rain short pulse approx 7 5 nm 16 mm h rain
269. s K N S 13 Display rotation see note 1 14 Checksum O Q T N NOTES 1 Display rotation C course up course over ground up degrees true H head up ship s heading center line 0 up N north up true north is 0 up 2 Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing from own ship and provide for two independent sets of variable range markers VRM and electronic bearing lines EBL originating away from own ship position AP 25 APPENDIX TLB Target label TLB x x c c X x c c x x c c hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 i 1 Target number reported by the device 2 Label assigned to target n 3 Additional label pairs 4 Checksum TLL Target latitude and longitude For non IMO specification radar This function outputs event mark position TLL xx llll Ill a yyyyy yyy a c c hhmmss ss a a hh CR LF L gi J l Jj dfe l j p 7 j 6 l t 5 dodo 4 t 3 ee ee 2 qa oe s n 1 1 Target number 00 99 2 Latitude N S 3 Longitude E W 4 Target name 5 UTC of data 6 Target status see note 7 Reference target R null otherwise 8 Checksum NOTE Target status L lost tracked target has been lost Q query target in the process of acquisition T tracking AP 26 APPENDIX TTD Tracked target data TTD hh hh x s s a x hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 1
270. s The FURUNO TTs comply with these requirements Acquisition and tracking A target which is hit by five consecutive radar pulses is detected as a radar echo Manual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball Automatic acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected 5 7 times continuously depending upon the congestion Tracking is achieved when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out of 10 consecutive scans whether acquired automatically or manually Required tracking facilities are available within 0 1 32 nm on range scales including 3 6 12 nm full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale has been changed Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become lost targets Quantization The entire picture is converted to a digital from called Quantized Video A sweep range is divided into small segments and each range element is 1 if there is radar echo return above a threshold level or 0 if there is no return The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship sized echo discriminator As the antenna scans if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1 s indicating an echo presence at the exact same range a target start is initiated Since receiver noise is random it is not three bang correlated and it is filtered out and not classified as an echo The same is true of radar interference Electronic circuits t
271. s target displays data for selected tracked target Als Activates sleeping AIS target display data for selected AIS target AIS Sleeps selected AIS target MARK DELETE Deletes selected mark plotter mark origin mark or waypoint mark 6 The guidance box shows XX EXIT XX function selected Use the trackball to put the cursor where desired 7 Push the left button to execute the function selected at step 5 8 To quit the function selected push the right button when the guidance box shows XX EXIT XX function selected at step 5 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 7 Monitor Brilliance The brilliance of the entire screen should be adjusted according to lighting conditions Monitor brilliance should be adjusted before adjusting relative brilliance levels on the BRILL menu to be explained later Note The brilliance of a commercial monitor cannot be adjusted from the radar See the owner s manual of the commercial monitor for how to adjust its brilliance By keyboard Operate the BRILL control on the control unit to adjust brilliance Turn it clockwise to increase brilliance counterclockwise to decrease brilliance Watch the BRILL box see illustration below to know current brilliance level By trackball 1 Use the trackball to place the arrow on the brilliance level indicator in the brilliance level indication box at the bottom left corner of the screen Brilliance bar Shows brilliance level Place arrow inside b
272. set watch time interval 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 3 ALARM to open the ALARM menu ALARM BACK TARGET ALARM MODE IN OUT TARGET ALARM MODE 1 2 3 4 WATCH ALARM OFF 6M 10M 12M 15M 20M ALARM SOUND LEVEL OFF LOW MID HIGH ALARM OUT 1 ALARM OUT2 ALARM OUT3 ALARM OUT4 PRIMARY ALARM ALARM menu 3 Select 4 WATCH ALARM 4 Select appropriate time interval then push the right button twice to close the menu 1 76 1 41 1 RADAR OPERATION Nav Data Wind depth ocean current water temperature date and time and waypoint data may be set up as follows 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 7 NAV DATA NAV DATA BACK DEPTH OFF m ft DEPTH GRAPH SCALE 10 20 50 100 200 500 DEPTH MARK 000 CURRENT OFF ON WIND OFF m s kn RELATIVE TRUE THEORETICAL TRUE NORTH TEMP OFF ON DATE TIME OFF UTC LOCAL LOCAL TIME ADJ 00 00 WPT DATA OFF REL TRUE NAV DATA menu 3 Select appropriate options referring to the table on the next page for details 1 77 1 RADAR OPERATION Item Nav data menu description Description 2 DEPTH Selects unit of depth measurement or turn depth indication off 3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE Selects depth scale range The echogram shows the last 30 minutes of sounding along the ship s track 4 DEPTH MARK Selects the depth at which to show the depth mark 5 CURRENT Turns ocean current displ
273. sfer the message 1 to 9 2 Message sentence number 1 to 9 3 Sequential Message identifier 0 to 9 4 AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message 5 VDL message number 8 14 19 or 21 see ITU R M 1371 6 Binary data 7 Number of fill bits 0 to 5 8 Checksum APPENDIX AP 23 APPENDIX OSD Own ship data OSD x x A x x a x x a x x x x a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 Heading degrees true 2 Heading status A data valid V data invalid 3 Vessel course degrees true 4 Course reference B M W R P see note 5 Vessel speed 6 Speed reference B M W R P see note 7 Vessel set degrees true Manually entered 8 Vessel drift speed Manually entered 9 Speed units K km h N Knots S statute miles h 10 Checksum NOTES Reference systems speed course B bottom tracking log M manually entered W water referenced R radar tracking of fixed target P positioning system ground reference AP 24 APPENDIX RSD Radar system data RARSD x x X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 4 4 Ah lt CR gt lt LF gt Origin 1 range from own ship see note 2 Origin 1 bearing degrees from 0 see note 2 Variable range marker 1 VRM1 range Bearing line 1 EBL1 degrees from 0 Origin 2 range see note 2 Origin 2 bearing see note 2 VRM2 range EBL2 degrees Cursor range from own ship 10 Cursor bearing degrees clockwise from 0 11 Range scale in use 12 Range unit
274. short pulse approx 5 6 nm 4 mm h rain long pulse approx 2 6 nm 16 mm h rain long pulse approx 0 9 nm 1 19 1 19 1 1 RADAR OPERATION Measuring Range The range to a target may be measured three ways with the fixed range rings with the cursor or with the VRM Use the fixed range rings to get an estimate of the range to a target The rings are the concentric solid circles on the display The number of rings is automatically set by the current range scale The distance between the rings is the range ring interval and the current interval appears at the upper left position on the screen To measure the range to a target with the range rings count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target Check the range ring interval and estimate the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring Showing hiding the fixed range rings 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 2 MARK MARK BACK 2 OWN SHIP MARK OFF MIN SCALED 3 STERN MARK OFF ON 4 PI LINE 5 ANCHOR WATCH OFF ON 0 0NM 6 DROP MARK OFF ON 7 INS MARK 8 EBL OFFSET BASE STAB GND STAB HDG STAB NORTH 9 EBL VRM CURSOR SET 1 BARGE MARK depending on installation preset 0 RING 2 IMO and A types show OFF ON 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING REL TRUE MARK menu 3 Select 0 RING 4 Select OFF or ON as appropriate then push the left button 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu
275. t MARK box Push the right button to open the MARK menu MARK MENU 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB GND SEA 2 MARK KIND ORIGIN MARK No ORIGIN MARK SYM MAP MARK WP 1 50 WP 51 100 WP 101 150 WP 151 198 OWN SHIP SHAPE 8 MARK POSN CURSOR OS L L 00 000 00 N 000 000 00 E 9 MAP DISPLAY OFF ON MAP MARK COLOR Not available on IMO RED GRN BLU YEL or A type CYA MAG WHT MARK menu Select 2 MARK KIND Select MAP MARK Note 1 For other than IMO and A type radars you may specify mark color by choosing 0 MAP MARK COLOR pushing the scrollwheel then choosing color desired Note 2 On the W type the indication MAP appears to the right of the MARK box Push the right button to close the menu The guidance box now reads MARK SELECT MARK MENU With the cursor choosing the MARK box use the scrollwheel to select the mark or line type you wish to inscribe then push the left button See the next page for available marks The cursor jumps into the effective display area and the guidance box now reads MARK EXIT Select 8 MARK POSN Select mark entry method CURSOR OS or L L For L L enter position For cursor use the trackball to put the cursor on the location desired You can see the range and bearing from own ship to the cursor location by monitoring the bearing and range indication just below the MARK box Push the left button to inscribe the mark or line point 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATI
276. t N3 0 fixed N9 5 fixed 8 SWITCHING HUB HUB 100 1 Access format 2 Switching format 3 Transmission speed 4 Necessary cabling 5 Max cable length 6 Ports 7 Port functinos CSMA CD Store and Forward Semi duplex 10 Mbps 100 Mbps Full duplex 20 Mbps 200 Mbps 10BASE T Category 3 or higher STP cable 100 BASE TX Category 5 or higher STP cable 100 m 8 ports All ports auto MDI MDIX compliant straight cross cable auto recognition EMC compliant STP cable port 3 LED injectors Link Act Full duplex Collision 100 10 Mbps 8 Environmental Conditions Ambient Temperature 15 to 50 C Relative Humidity EMC Degree of protection 9 Power source 10 Coating color 95 at 40 C IEC 60945 IPXO 100 230 VAC 0 1A or less N3 0 SP 4 E3519S01P M INDEX 2 2 echo rejector 1 74 A RAIN adjustment 2 1 29 A C SEA adjustment automatic 1 28 manuala e uuu u 1 27 method 1 27 AIC SEA OX 1 27 Acquisition zone acknowledging 3 23 activalllig ou o diet deitate 3 22 deactivating 3 23 reference 3 24 cre ET 3 24 sleeping cese ro Does 3 23 AIS activating targets all
277. t the end of selected time is shown Increase or decrease the time to get a safe manuever When the cursor is removed from the box the original positions of your ship and tracked targets are restored If a manuever is unsafe change speed course and delay until it is safe The trial maneuver takes place with the letter T displayed at the bottom of the screen The time appears at the top right side of the display If any tracked target is predicted to be on a collision course with own ship that is the target ship comes within preset CPA TCPA limits the target plotting symbol is red If this happens change own ship s trial speed course or delay time to obtain a safe maneuver Terminating a trial maneuver A trial maneuver is automatically terminated at the end of the fixed time and the normal radar display is restored The time of termination depends on the trial mode as follows Dynamic mode The trial is terminated when 60 minutes is shown in the Trial Time Box Static mode The trial is terminated when there is no key operation within one minute To terminate the trial maneuver manually put the cursor in the Trial Time box then push the left button to show TRAIL OFF in the box Note To stop the trial maneuver select OFF at step 5 in the procedure in section 3 16 2 3 29 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 17 3 30 TT Performance Test A test program is provided for assessing overall performance of the TT Normal operation is
278. t the left side of the screen ANT1 X BAND M gt 2 Rollthe scrollwheel to choose an antenna then push the left button Cursor Data Cursor data can be shown in latitude and longitude specification radar position or cursor s X Y coordinates with the C _ 34 40 849 N 135 18 303 E Left click the CURSOR DATA box at the right side of CURSOR DATA box L L position the display to select the cursor data to show The cursor data changes in the sequence shown below 30 323 N Latitude and longitude 34 135 08 263 E position of cursor D Cursor X Y position Cursor data options Note 1 For the X Y coordinates display the Y axis is the heading line right top is plus and left lower is minus Note 2 When displaying latitude and longitude position and the cursor has been aligned on the PLOTTER menu the indication CHART ALIGN appears at the right side of the screen in red Note 3 Cursor data reads when the cursor is placed outside the effective display area Note 4 Cursor bearing format true or relative and cursor range unit nm sm km or kyd are available as below Type Cursor bearing format Cursor range unit Menu operation Yes Yes No No 2 MARK 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 gt gt Yes No 2 MARK 9 EBL VRM CURSOR SET CURSOR BEARING CURSOR RANGE 1 93 1 RADAR
279. ta invalid AP 14 APPENDIX RMB Recommended minimum navigation information RMB A x x a C C C C Il Ill a yyyyy yyy a x X X X x x A a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Data status A data valid V navigation receiver warning Cross track error see note 2 nautical miles Direction to steer L R Origin waypoint ID Destination waypoint ID Destination waypoint latitude N S Destination waypoint longitude Range to destination nautical miles see note 1 Bearing to destination degrees true 10 Destination closing velocity knots 11 Arrival status A arrival circle entered or perpendicular passed 12 Mode indicator see note 3 13 Checksum OONDARWNA NOTES 1 If range to destination exceeds 999 9 nautical miles display 999 9 2 f cross track error exceeds 9 99 nautical miles display 9 99 3 Positioning system Mode indicator A Autonomous D Differential E Estimated dead reckoning M Manual input S Simulator N Data not valid The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field The Status field shall be set to V invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A Autonomous and D Differential The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not be null fields Data is used in case of A data valid and A and D Data is not used in case of V data invalid E M S and N AP 15 APPENDIX RMC Recommended minimum specific GPSITRANSIT data RMC hhmmss ss
280. targets and are colored red See section 3 14 for details Activating specific targets manually By keyboard 1 Use the trackball to put the cursor on the AIS target you wish activate 2 Press the TARGET DATA key to activate the target By trackball 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to display TARGET DATA amp CURSOR in the guidance box 2 Use the trackball to put the cursor on the sleeping AIS target you wish to activate that is know more about a vessel s motion 3 Push the left button to activate the target SOG Speed over Ground and COG Course over Ground vector 1 7 7 7 1 Vector shows STW speed icon direction thru water and CSE 4 Headinn line course when water eading ine tracking mode is z If there IS no heading data selected at the radar the line points in direction of COG Activated target Activating all targets 1 Right click the AIS DISP box to open the AIS TARGET menu 2 Select 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS 3 Push the right button to close the menu Dangerous target When an activated target violates the CPA TCPA alarm setting its symbol changes to the dangerous 2 target symbol red and flashing and the indication gt to acknowledge the CPA TCPA alarm The audible alarm is silenced and the symbol stops flashing Take appropriate action to avoid collision AIS COLLISON appears Press the
281. tation from the menu For how to stop rotation from the menu see the installation manual Picture freeze When the picture freezes the picture is not updated 30 seconds after the picture freezes the buzzer sounds the ALARM ACK key blinks and the alarm contact signal is output Reset the power to restore normal operation Quick start Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube magnetron still warm you can turn the radar into TRANSMIT condition without three minutes of warm up If the POWER switch was turned off by mistake or the like and you wish to restart the radar promptly turn on the POWER switch not later than 10 seconds after power off Echo area The echo display area for the B C and W types is available in three configurations round wide and full screen You can select a configuration with 7 ECHO AREA on the ECHO menu Round Wide Full 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 3 Control Unit Two types of control units are available Control Unit RCU 014 full keyboard and Control Unit RCU 105 palm control EBL rotary control VRM rotary control Scrollwheel Left button Right button oll Y 2 SEE BL VRM OFFSET 6 5 CUITM RESET LINE m w o Sra a OFF CENTER 5 ERN u 8 8 9 IVECTOR TARGET TIME MODE LIST ACQ TARGET ENTER TARGET BRILL MARK CANCEL DATA gt gt 2
282. tch during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0 64 nautical miles will be shown When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm the radar display my show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps These additional dot responses which also are equally spaced by 0 64 nautical miles will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots Screen A When SART Screen B When SART is distant is close Lines of 12 dots are displayed in concentric arcs Echo from SART Radar antenna beamwidth Echo from SART Position of SART Own ship position Own ship position Position of SART Radar receiver bandwidth A Low speed sweep signal Sweep start High speed sweep signal SART 2 5 2 RADAR OBSERVATION 2 3 2 Showing SART marks on the radar display This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART detection This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best tuning condition This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes but the SART marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all frequencies in the 9 GHz band When the radar approaches the SART in operation the SART marks will enlarge to large arcs blurring a large part of the screen To set up for SART detection do the fo
283. ted echoes are A C RAIN control adjusted dienlavad The A C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A C SEA control does but rather in a longer time period longer range The higher the setting the greater the anti clutter effect When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets adjust the A C RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern making recognition of solid targets easier Be careful remove all rain clutter because you can erase weak echoes Further the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A C RAIN and A C SEA to reduce clutter Keyboard 1 Use the trackball to put the cursor in the A C RAIN level indicator at Level bar the top right side of the display 2 While observing the A C RAIN level Scene er indicator roll the scrollwheel downward to increase the A C RAIN or upward to decrease it 100 levels 0 100 are available 1 29 1 RADAR OPERATION Reduction of Range of First Detection NM Reduction of Range of First Detection NM Note The detection range is reduced when the A C RAIN is used to show targets in rain Generally the amount of rain TX pulse length and TX frequency are factors in determining how the detection range is affected The figures shown below illustrate this occurrence 4 mm h rain short pulse 16 rain short 4 rain short pulse iy 16 mm h rain sho
284. tes own ship s heading The target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship s heading A short line on the bearing scale is the north marker indicating heading sensor north A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the north marker to disappear and the readout to show and the message SIG MISSING appears in red at the lower right corner of the screen North Marker Heading rine Note When display is off centered the heading mark appears at 000 degrees Head up mode Course up mode The course up mode is an azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting the center with the top of the display indicates own ship s intended course namely own ship s previous heading just before this mode has been selected Target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to the intended course which is maintained at the 0 degree position The heading line moves in accordance with ship s yawing and course change This mode is useful to avoid smearing of picture during course change North Marker Heading Line Course up mode 1 RADAR OPERATION Head up TB True Bearing mode Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the head up mode The difference from normal head up presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing scale The bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized That is it rotates in accordance wit
285. th 1 24 PULSELENGTH 1 25 Q a a ea 1 2 R RACON E 2 8 CHOOSING ooi ca 1 23 measurement 1 31 RANGE DOX erret Se sei us 1 23 RANGE 1 23 Range ring 1 31 Reference position 1 99 S SARI S AA e 2 5 Scrollwheel drive 1 82 Second trace echo rejector 1 74 Sensitivity 1 26 Serial interface WAP DOWNS 28 output ports 29 Set and drift 3 20 SEISDOX ays UI 3 20 Shuttle ferry 1 82 SO ua 1 22 3 20 SPD 0 1 22 Speed automatic input 1 22 echo referenced input 3 3 manual 1 23 SPEED menu 1 22 STBY TX key tete eec otto 1 1 Stern marker 1 59 Stern up mode descripBOD 1 20 enabling disabling 1 82 SUD monitor 1 105 Switching Hub HUB 100 1 101
286. tion zone keeps position relation with your ship STAB NORTH Acquisition zone is fixed to North 5 Push the right button twice to close menu Acquisition zone shape and stabilization The shape of the No 2 acquisition zone may be a sector or a polygon having up to 10 points The shape of the No 1 acquisition zone is always a sector Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 4 TT AIS to open the TT AIS menu Select 3 AZ POLYGON Select OFF STAB GND STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as appropriate OFF Acquisition zone is a sector number of points is limited to four Stabilized against land STAB GND Polygon having 3 10 points Stabilized against ground STAB HDG Polygon having 3 10 points Stabilized against heading STAB NORTH Polygon having 3 10 points Stabilized against North 5 Push the right button twice to close menu 3 TARGET TRACKING TT 3 15 TT System Messages There are seven main situations that cause the TT to trigger audio and visual alarms e Reference target alarm e Collision alarm e Acquisition zone alarm e Lost target alarm e Target full alarm for manual acquisition Target full alarm for automatic acquisition e System failure To acknowledge the audio alarm press the ALARM ACK key or select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button TT system messages REF TARGET LOST When the system detects a loss of a Press the ALARM ACK reference target the target symbol turns
287. tted Tx repetition Second trace echo tS False h range Actual range Second trace echoes To reject second trace echoes 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 1 ECHO to open the ECHO menu ECHO BACK 2 20 ECHO REJ OFF ON TUNE INITIALIZE Not available on IMO or A type CIRCLE WIDE ALL 8 PICTURE SELECT 9 STC RANGE 00 ECHO menu 3 Select 2 2 ECHO REJ 4 Select OFF or ON as appropriate 5 Push the right button twice to close the menu 1 74 1 39 1 RADAR OPERATION Brilliance of Screen Data You can adjust relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric readouts displayed on the screen 1 Right click the BRILL box at the bottom left corner of the screen to show the BRILL menu BRILL1 MENU 1 2 Not available BRILL1 MENU 2 2 on IMO or A type ECHO COLOR YEL GRN Choose 0 NEXT WHT COLOR to show page 2 PALETTE of the BRILL menu DAY GRY DAY BLU DUSK GRY DUSK BLU NIGHT GRY NIGHT BLU PANEL DIMMER CHARACTER CURSOR ECHO O O BACK BRG CURSOR EBL VRM PI LINE TT SYMBOL AIS SYMBOL L L GRID MARK CHART O Note Four brilliance and color sets are provided For further details see section 1 49 BRILL menu 2 Select item you wish to adjust To go to the second page of the BRILL menu select 0 NEXT and push the scrollwheel
288. turn to page 1 by choosing 1 BACK and pressing the scrollwheel or the left button DISPLAY 1 2 DISPLAY 2 2 1 BACK 1 BACK 2 GRID Choose 2 NAV LINE MAP OFF L L ONExr OFF ON 3 OWN TRACK toshow 3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT OFF ON Bage 2 OFF ON 4 TARGET TRACK 4 PROHIBITED AREA OFF ON OFF ON 5 MARK 5 BUOY OFF ON OFF ON 6 LAND DENSITY OFF ON 7 PLACE NAME OFF ON 8 COAST LINE OFF ON 9 CONTOUR LINE OFF ON DEPTH NEXT Not available on IMO or A type Page 1 DISPLAY menus Push the scrollwheel to select OFF or ON Note LAND DENSITY fills ON or hollows OFF land on an electronic chart Land will be hollow when wrong card or wrong scale is used regardless of LAND DENSITY setting Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set other items Push the right button three or four times to close the menu depending on which page of the DISPLAY menu you are using 5 9 5 9 1 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION Track Plotting own ship s track A total of 20 000 points are allotted for storage of own ship s track marks and lines When this memory becomes full the oldest track is deleted to make room for the latest For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to conserve the memory The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track recording time Own track plotting interval and storage time Interval Max Recording Time Interval Max Recording Time 55 hr 30 min 27 days 18 hr 40 min
289. umber of targets automatically the message TARGET FULL AUTO or MAN appears at the right side of the screen and no more auto acquisition occurs unless targets are lost Should this happen cancel tracking of less important targets or perform manual acquisition Canceling individual targets By keyboard 1 Use the trackball to put the cursor on the tracked target reference target or lost target you wish to cancel tracking 2 Press the TARGET CANCEL key By trackball 1 With the cursor inside the effective display area roll the scrollwheel to show TARGET CANCEL EXIT in the guidance box 2 Putthe cursor on the tracked target reference target or lost target you wish to cancel tracking Push the left button to cancel tracking on the target selected 4 To finish push the right button 62 Canceling tracking all targets 1 Right click the TT ACQ MODE box at the right side of the screen to show the TT TARGET menu TT TARGET MENU TT SELECT MANUAL100 AUTO 25 AUTO 50 AUTO 75 AUTO 100 ALL CANCEL NO YES REF TARGET VECTOR OFF ON TT TARGET menu 2 Select 2 ALL CANCEL and YES 3 Push the left button to cancel tracking on all tracked targets 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Manual Acquisition Maximum 100 targets may be acquired manually depending on the acquisition condition set on the TT TGT menu Setting manual acquisition conditions 1 Right click the ar
290. under check 6 11 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 12 7 Press the F1 key to change the display The buzzer stops and the screen shows the sentences being input from external GPS1 GPS2SPEED HEADING and NAV DATA Below is an example The sentences shown depend on your system settings lt GPS1 gt GGA GLL RMC RMB VTG ZDA DTM BWR BWC lt GPS2 gt GGA GLL RMC RMB VTG 204 DTM BWR BWC lt SPEED gt VBW VHW VDR lt HEADING gt HDT lt NAV DATA gt WPL RTE MWV VWT VWR DPT DBT DBS MTW VDM Sentence input display 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 8 Press the F1 key again to show the data sentences input from AIS and INS lt AlS gt VDO VDM lt INS gt ZDA GGA GLL OSD DPT MWV DTM FUGLL PAESP PAESC PAESF PLSPL PLSPS PAESW PAESN 8 To terminate the test press the F1 key 6 13 6 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING This page intentionally left blank 6 14 APPENDIX 1 Menu Tree Main menu accessed by MENU key or MENU box MENU key or MENU box Continued on next page Not available on IMO or A type ew type shows PI LINE1 Same choices as PI LINE Sw type shows PI LINE2 Same choices as PI LINE 4 Appears when 3 PI LINE is set for other than 1 Not shown on IMO or A type When INS MARK is OFF BARGE MARK menu appears 7 BARGE MARK 1 BACK 2 BARGE MARK OFF ON
291. utomatically removed when is selected Nav Data or Zoom Nav Data or Zoom 2 BOX 1 BOX TT AIS Functions TT AIS Functions Box Box Warnings Alerts Warnings Alerts 1 BOX 2 BOX Nav Data or Zoom LARGE TT AIS Functions TT AIS Functions Box Box Warnings Alerts Warnings Alerts 3 BOX LARGE Tracked data setting and data box arrangement 13 Push the right button three times to close the menu 1 43 1 RADAR OPERATION Customizing Operation Several operation items may be customized to suit your needs 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 9 CUSTOMIZE TEST to open the CUSTOMIZE TEST menu CUSTOMIZE TEST BACK DATA BOX F 1 F2 F3 F4 OPERATION TEST Q N CUSTOMIZE TEST menu 3 Select 7 OPERATION OPERATION 1 BACK 2 WHEEL DRIVE NORMAL REVERSE 3 KEY BEEP OFF LO MID HI 4 REMOTE KEY F KEY DISPLAY SELECT 5 POP UP GUIDANCE OFF ON 6 OWN SHIP VECTOR OFF HDG COURSE 7 STERN UP OFF ON 8 SHUTTLE FERRY OFF MODE1 MODE2 Not available on IMO or A type 0 NEXT OPERATION menu 4 Set each item as appropriate referring to the table on the next page for details 5 Push the right button to close the menu 1 81 1 RADAR OPERATION 1 82 Operation menu items ItemNo Description Options 2 WHEEL DRIVE 3 KEY BEEP 4 REMOTE KEY 5 POP UP GUIDANCE Available on B C and W types 6
292. uts the landmass can move on the screen Note that true motion is not available on the 72 nm non IMO type only or 96 nm range scale If COG and SOG both over the ground are not available on TM mode enter the set tide direction and drift tide speed manually referring to the Tide Table When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 50 of the radius of the display own ship position is automatically reset to a point of 75 radius opposite to the extension of the heading line passing through the display center You may also reset the own ship symbol manually by pressing the CU TM RESET key or left clicking the CU TM RESET box at the bottom right corner of the display If the heading sensor fails the mode is changed to the head up and the north marker disappears The HDG readout shows and the message HDG SIG MISSING appears in red at the lower right corner of the screen Note A part of the bearing scale is drawn differently depending on antenna reference position ANT Bearing scale interval is different when display is offcentered CONN part of the bearing scale is not displayed if the conning position is not within the radar display area North Marker Heading Line True motion mode Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode North marker Heading line a True motion b Own ship has reached a c Own ship is automatically is selected point 75 of display radius reset to 75 of radius
293. ve EBL between No 1 and No 2 The currently active marker is enclosed with gt lt 2 Operate the EBL rotary control clockwise or counterclockwise until the active EBL bisects the target of interest and read its bearing at the lower left corner of the screen 3 Press the EBL OFF key to erase each EBL By trackball 1 Use the trackball to place the arrow in the EBL1 or EBL2 box whichever EBL you want to use EBL1 EBL2 EBL boxes 2 The guidance box reads EBL ON Push the left button to turn on the EBL The guidance box now reads EBL SET L DELETE 3 Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display area The guidance box now reads EBL FIX L DELETE 4 Use the trackball coarse adjustment or scrollwheel fine adjustment to bisect the target with the EBL 5 Push the left button to anchor the EBL and fix its readout or push the right button to return the EBL to its previous location bearing 6 To erase an EBL select the appropriate EBL readout box then push the left button until the EBL disappears from the screen 1 20 2 1 RADAR OPERATION 350 000 010 020 h 030 7 Range markers on EBLs ls EBL Pea nny 129 210 Pg 150 190 180 170 160 EBL1 gt 128 0 T lt VRM1 2102 2 10087 12 1Ni Measuring bearing with EBLs True or relative bear
294. w selecting the current display and antenna combination for the no 2 display unit Roll the scrollwheel to display ANT1 MASTER and push the left button Repeat step 3 and 4 to set other display and antenna combinations Select 0 STORE INTER SW Select YES to save display and antenna combinations Push the right button twice to close the menu t O Or P Selection considerations e A antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units Select one MASTER display unit for one antenna unit If two antenna units are set as masters the display last set as master becomes the master and all other displays are automatically changed to slave e An antenna unit without a MASTER display cannot be selected on the sub display units If there is no antenna unit set as master the lowest number display is automatically set as master 1 91 1 RADAR OPE RATION e Radar functions are controlled independently dependently or commonly depending on selection as Master or Slave RADAR FUNCTIONS CONTROL MASTER DISPLAY OPTION AIS function Brilliance Echo stretch Echo averaging Echo trails EBL Lat long data Presentation mode Speed data Target alarm TT AIS on off TT AIS track interval Vector mode Vector time VRM Wiper Zoom Range Sampling at Master AIC SEA RAIN Auto Rain Gain IR Picture setting STBY TX Tuning Reference point TT LOST alarm TT COLLISION alarm TT alarms ACK TT acquire
295. which results in wrong collision avoidance information Further an unstable stationary target produces inaccurate speed data and the target itself may become lost e When a reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range that reference target mark blinks and the indication REF TARGET LOST appears in the alarm box If all reference targets are lost the speed indication reads Select a different reference target if currently selected one is lost e When all targets are deleted the reference target mark is also deleted and the target based speed becomes invalid The speed is indicated as BTREF where BT means Bottom Track speed over ground e Reference targets may be marked with a vector This can be done with 3 REF TARGET VECTOR on the TT TARGET menu e Loss of reference target will affect the calculation of true speed and true course of targets Further own ship speed will be inaccurate Canceling echo referenced speed input Open the SPD menu referring to section 1 13 and set 1 SHIP SPEED to LOG NAV or MANUAL as appropriate 3 5 3 5 1 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Automatic Acquisition The 2 7 radars can acquire a maximum of 100 targets the number of automatically and manually acquired targets determined by the TT TARGET menu setting TT TARGET setting and target acquisition condition Menu Setting Acquisition condition MANUAL100 100 targets manually AUTO25 25 targets automatically 75 t
296. you can access TT functions by rolling the scrollwheel or choosing appropriate TT function from the CURSOR menu Roll the scrollwheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to access respective TT function TT TARGET DATA amp ACQ Manually acquires a target or displays data of the cursor selected tracked target TARGET CANCEL Cancels tracking on cursor selected tracked target 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 TARGET TRACKING TT Activating Deactivating TT To activate or deactivate the TT Left click the arrow in the TT ACQ MODE box at the right side of the display to show OFF MAN AUTO or AUTO MAN as appropriate AUTO TT MAN 4 TT ACQ MODE box Entering Own Ship s Speed The TT requires own ship s speed and heading data The speed can be STW SOG or echo referenced speed based on 3 max stationary objects Manual input is also possible For automatic or manual input see section 1 13 For echo referenced speed input follow the procedure below Echo referenced speed input The use of echo referenced speed is recommended when e The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar e The vessel has no device doppler sonar speed log etc that can measure ship s bow stern port starboard movement If you select echo referenced speed the TT calculates own ship s speed relative to a fixed reference target The number of targets may be R1 R2 or R3 When a plural of objects
297. ypes 1 2 3 Left click the MENU box to open the menu Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu Select 4 OWN TRACK COLOR or 6 TGT TRACK COLOR whichever track color you want to set Select color desired Push the right button twice to close the menu 5 15 5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION 5 9 5 Erasing track from the menu on the screen The display may become full of track when for example own ship traces the same route several times or there are many tracks from other ships You may erase track two ways through the menu by color or percentage or directly on the screen track between specified points is erased Erasing track from the menu 1 Left click the MENU box to open the menu 2 Select 5 PLOTTER to open the PLOTTER menu 3 Select 8 DATA ERASE DATA ERASE BACK 2 OWN TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL TARGET TRACK RED GRN BLU YEL CYA MAG WHT 30 50 80 ALL MARK ALL ERASE NO YES WPT ALL ERASE NO YES NAV LINE ALL ERASE NO YES OWN TRACK DELETE 2POINTS AREA Colors not shown on IMO type TARGET TRACK DELETE 2 Not available on IMO type 2POINTS AREA 3 Not available on IMO or A type DATA ERASE menu 4 Select 2 OWN TRACK or 3 TARGET TRACK not available on IMO type radar whichever track you want to erase 5 Select color not available on IMO type or percentage to erase For example 30 erases the oldest 30 of the track selected at step 4

Furuno FAR-2107(-BB) Marine RADAR User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents